← Back
Editing: options.txt
*options.txt* For Vim version 8.0. Last change: 2018 Apr 21 VIM REFERENCE MANUAL by Bram Moolenaar Options *options* 1. Setting options |set-option| 2. Automatically setting options |auto-setting| 3. Options summary |option-summary| For an overview of options see quickref.txt |option-list|. Vim has a number of internal variables and switches which can be set to achieve special effects. These options come in three forms: boolean can only be on or off *boolean* *toggle* number has a numeric value string has a string value ============================================================================== 1. Setting options *set-option* *E764* *:se* *:set* :se[t] Show all options that differ from their default value. :se[t] all Show all but terminal options. :se[t] termcap Show all terminal options. Note that in the GUI the key codes are not shown, because they are generated internally and can't be changed. Changing the terminal codes in the GUI is not useful either... *E518* *E519* :se[t] {option}? Show value of {option}. :se[t] {option} Toggle option: set, switch it on. Number option: show value. String option: show value. :se[t] no{option} Toggle option: Reset, switch it off. *:set-!* *:set-inv* :se[t] {option}! or :se[t] inv{option} Toggle option: Invert value. {not in Vi} *:set-default* *:set-&* *:set-&vi* *:set-&vim* :se[t] {option}& Reset option to its default value. May depend on the current value of 'compatible'. {not in Vi} :se[t] {option}&vi Reset option to its Vi default value. {not in Vi} :se[t] {option}&vim Reset option to its Vim default value. {not in Vi} :se[t] all& Set all options to their default value. The values of these options are not changed: all terminal options, starting with t_ 'columns' 'cryptmethod' 'encoding' 'key' 'lines' 'term' 'ttymouse' 'ttytype' Warning: This may have a lot of side effects. {not in Vi} *:set-args* *E487* *E521* :se[t] {option}={value} or :se[t] {option}:{value} Set string or number option to {value}. For numeric options the value can be given in decimal, hex (preceded with 0x) or octal (preceded with '0'). The old value can be inserted by typing 'wildchar' (by default this is a <Tab> or CTRL-E if 'compatible' is set). See |cmdline-completion|. White space between {option} and '=' is allowed and will be ignored. White space between '=' and {value} is not allowed. See |option-backslash| for using white space and backslashes in {value}. :se[t] {option}+={value} *:set+=* Add the {value} to a number option, or append the {value} to a string option. When the option is a comma separated list, a comma is added, unless the value was empty. If the option is a list of flags, superfluous flags are removed. When adding a flag that was already present the option value doesn't change. Also see |:set-args| above. {not in Vi} :se[t] {option}^={value} *:set^=* Multiply the {value} to a number option, or prepend the {value} to a string option. When the option is a comma separated list, a comma is added, unless the value was empty. Also see |:set-args| above. {not in Vi} :se[t] {option}-={value} *:set-=* Subtract the {value} from a number option, or remove the {value} from a string option, if it is there. If the {value} is not found in a string option, there is no error or warning. When the option is a comma separated list, a comma is deleted, unless the option becomes empty. When the option is a list of flags, {value} must be exactly as they appear in the option. Remove flags one by one to avoid problems. Also see |:set-args| above. {not in Vi} The {option} arguments to ":set" may be repeated. For example: > :set ai nosi sw=3 ts=3 If you make an error in one of the arguments, an error message will be given and the following arguments will be ignored. *:set-verbose* When 'verbose' is non-zero, displaying an option value will also tell where it was last set. Example: > :verbose set shiftwidth cindent? < shiftwidth=4 ~ Last set from modeline ~ cindent ~ Last set from /usr/local/share/vim/vim60/ftplugin/c.vim ~ This is only done when specific option values are requested, not for ":verbose set all" or ":verbose set" without an argument. When the option was set by hand there is no "Last set" message. When the option was set while executing a function, user command or autocommand, the script in which it was defined is reported. Note that an option may also have been set as a side effect of setting 'compatible'. A few special texts: Last set from modeline ~ Option was set in a |modeline|. Last set from --cmd argument ~ Option was set with command line argument |--cmd| or +. Last set from -c argument ~ Option was set with command line argument |-c|, +, |-S| or |-q|. Last set from environment variable ~ Option was set from an environment variable, $VIMINIT, $GVIMINIT or $EXINIT. Last set from error handler ~ Option was cleared when evaluating it resulted in an error. {not available when compiled without the |+eval| feature} *:set-termcap* *E522* For {option} the form "t_xx" may be used to set a terminal option. This will override the value from the termcap. You can then use it in a mapping. If the "xx" part contains special characters, use the <t_xx> form: > :set <t_#4>=^[Ot This can also be used to translate a special code for a normal key. For example, if Alt-b produces <Esc>b, use this: > :set <M-b>=^[b (the ^[ is a real <Esc> here, use CTRL-V <Esc> to enter it) The advantage over a mapping is that it works in all situations. You can define any key codes, e.g.: > :set t_xy=^[foo; There is no warning for using a name that isn't recognized. You can map these codes as you like: > :map <t_xy> something < *E846* When a key code is not set, it's like it does not exist. Trying to get its value will result in an error: > :set t_kb= :set t_kb E846: Key code not set: t_kb The t_xx options cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for security reasons. The listing from ":set" looks different from Vi. Long string options are put at the end of the list. The number of options is quite large. The output of "set all" probably does not fit on the screen, causing Vim to give the |more-prompt|. *option-backslash* To include white space in a string option value it has to be preceded with a backslash. To include a backslash you have to use two. Effectively this means that the number of backslashes in an option value is halved (rounded down). A few examples: > :set tags=tags\ /usr/tags results in "tags /usr/tags" :set tags=tags\\,file results in "tags\,file" :set tags=tags\\\ file results in "tags\ file" The "|" character separates a ":set" command from a following command. To include the "|" in the option value, use "\|" instead. This example sets the 'titlestring' option to "hi|there": > :set titlestring=hi\|there This sets the 'titlestring' option to "hi" and 'iconstring' to "there": > :set titlestring=hi|set iconstring=there Similarly, the double quote character starts a comment. To include the '"' in the option value, use '\"' instead. This example sets the 'titlestring' option to 'hi "there"': > :set titlestring=hi\ \"there\" For MS-DOS and WIN32 backslashes in file names are mostly not removed. More precise: For options that expect a file name (those where environment variables are expanded) a backslash before a normal file name character is not removed. But a backslash before a special character (space, backslash, comma, etc.) is used like explained above. There is one special situation, when the value starts with "\\": > :set dir=\\machine\path results in "\\machine\path" :set dir=\\\\machine\\path results in "\\machine\path" :set dir=\\path\\file results in "\\path\file" (wrong!) For the first one the start is kept, but for the second one the backslashes are halved. This makes sure it works both when you expect backslashes to be halved and when you expect the backslashes to be kept. The third gives a result which is probably not what you want. Avoid it. *add-option-flags* *remove-option-flags* *E539* *E550* *E551* *E552* Some options are a list of flags. When you want to add a flag to such an option, without changing the existing ones, you can do it like this: > :set guioptions+=a Remove a flag from an option like this: > :set guioptions-=a This removes the 'a' flag from 'guioptions'. Note that you should add or remove one flag at a time. If 'guioptions' has the value "ab", using "set guioptions-=ba" won't work, because the string "ba" doesn't appear. *:set_env* *expand-env* *expand-environment-var* Environment variables in specific string options will be expanded. If the environment variable exists the '$' and the following environment variable name is replaced with its value. If it does not exist the '$' and the name are not modified. Any non-id character (not a letter, digit or '_') may follow the environment variable name. That character and what follows is appended to the value of the environment variable. Examples: > :set term=$TERM.new :set path=/usr/$INCLUDE,$HOME/include,. When adding or removing a string from an option with ":set opt-=val" or ":set opt+=val" the expansion is done before the adding or removing. Handling of local options *local-options* Some of the options only apply to a window or buffer. Each window or buffer has its own copy of this option, thus each can have its own value. This allows you to set 'list' in one window but not in another. And set 'shiftwidth' to 3 in one buffer and 4 in another. The following explains what happens to these local options in specific situations. You don't really need to know all of this, since Vim mostly uses the option values you would expect. Unfortunately, doing what the user expects is a bit complicated... When splitting a window, the local options are copied to the new window. Thus right after the split the contents of the two windows look the same. When editing a new buffer, its local option values must be initialized. Since the local options of the current buffer might be specifically for that buffer, these are not used. Instead, for each buffer-local option there also is a global value, which is used for new buffers. With ":set" both the local and global value is changed. With "setlocal" only the local value is changed, thus this value is not used when editing a new buffer. When editing a buffer that has been edited before, the options from the window that was last closed are used again. If this buffer has been edited in this window, the values from back then are used. Otherwise the values from the last closed window where the buffer was edited last are used. It's possible to set a local window option specifically for a type of buffer. When you edit another buffer in the same window, you don't want to keep using these local window options. Therefore Vim keeps a global value of the local window options, which is used when editing another buffer. Each window has its own copy of these values. Thus these are local to the window, but global to all buffers in the window. With this you can do: > :e one :set list :e two Now the 'list' option will also be set in "two", since with the ":set list" command you have also set the global value. > :set nolist :e one :setlocal list :e two Now the 'list' option is not set, because ":set nolist" resets the global value, ":setlocal list" only changes the local value and ":e two" gets the global value. Note that if you do this next: > :e one You will get back the 'list' value as it was the last time you edited "one". The options local to a window are remembered for each buffer. This also happens when the buffer is not loaded, but they are lost when the buffer is wiped out |:bwipe|. *:setl* *:setlocal* :setl[ocal] ... Like ":set" but set only the value local to the current buffer or window. Not all options have a local value. If the option does not have a local value the global value is set. With the "all" argument: display local values for all local options. Without argument: Display local values for all local options which are different from the default. When displaying a specific local option, show the local value. For a global/local boolean option, when the global value is being used, "--" is displayed before the option name. For a global option the global value is shown (but that might change in the future). {not in Vi} :setl[ocal] {option}< Set the local value of {option} to its global value by copying the value. {not in Vi} :se[t] {option}< For |global-local| options: Remove the local value of {option}, so that the global value will be used. {not in Vi} *:setg* *:setglobal* :setg[lobal] ... Like ":set" but set only the global value for a local option without changing the local value. When displaying an option, the global value is shown. With the "all" argument: display global values for all local options. Without argument: display global values for all local options which are different from the default. {not in Vi} For buffer-local and window-local options: Command global value local value ~ :set option=value set set :setlocal option=value - set :setglobal option=value set - :set option? - display :setlocal option? - display :setglobal option? display - Global options with a local value *global-local* Options are global when you mostly use one value for all buffers and windows. For some global options it's useful to sometimes have a different local value. You can set the local value with ":setlocal". That buffer or window will then use the local value, while other buffers and windows continue using the global value. For example, you have two windows, both on C source code. They use the global 'makeprg' option. If you do this in one of the two windows: > :set makeprg=gmake then the other window will switch to the same value. There is no need to set the 'makeprg' option in the other C source window too. However, if you start editing a Perl file in a new window, you want to use another 'makeprg' for it, without changing the value used for the C source files. You use this command: > :setlocal makeprg=perlmake You can switch back to using the global value by making the local value empty: > :setlocal makeprg= This only works for a string option. For a boolean option you need to use the "<" flag, like this: > :setlocal autoread< Note that for non-boolean options using "<" copies the global value to the local value, it doesn't switch back to using the global value (that matters when the global value changes later). You can also use: > :set path< This will make the local value of 'path' empty, so that the global value is used. Thus it does the same as: > :setlocal path= Note: In the future more global options can be made global-local. Using ":setlocal" on a global option might work differently then. Setting the filetype :setf[iletype] [FALLBACK] {filetype} *:setf* *:setfiletype* Set the 'filetype' option to {filetype}, but only if not done yet in a sequence of (nested) autocommands. This is short for: > :if !did_filetype() : setlocal filetype={filetype} :endif < This command is used in a filetype.vim file to avoid setting the 'filetype' option twice, causing different settings and syntax files to be loaded. When the optional FALLBACK argument is present, a later :setfiletype command will override the 'filetype'. This is to used for filetype detections that are just a guess. |did_filetype()| will return false after this command. {not in Vi} *option-window* *optwin* :bro[wse] se[t] *:set-browse* *:browse-set* *:opt* *:options* :opt[ions] Open a window for viewing and setting all options. Options are grouped by function. Offers short help for each option. Hit <CR> on the short help to open a help window with more help for the option. Modify the value of the option and hit <CR> on the "set" line to set the new value. For window and buffer specific options, the last accessed window is used to set the option value in, unless this is a help window, in which case the window below help window is used (skipping the option-window). {not available when compiled without the |+eval| feature} *$HOME* Using "~" is like using "$HOME", but it is only recognized at the start of an option and after a space or comma. On Unix systems "~user" can be used too. It is replaced by the home directory of user "user". Example: > :set path=~mool/include,/usr/include,. On Unix systems the form "${HOME}" can be used too. The name between {} can contain non-id characters then. Note that if you want to use this for the "gf" command, you need to add the '{' and '}' characters to 'isfname'. NOTE: expanding environment variables and "~/" is only done with the ":set" command, not when assigning a value to an option with ":let". *$HOME-windows* On MS-Windows, if $HOME is not defined as an environment variable, then at runtime Vim will set it to the expansion of $HOMEDRIVE$HOMEPATH. If $HOMEDRIVE is not set then $USERPROFILE is used. This expanded value is not exported to the environment, this matters when running an external command: > :echo system('set | findstr ^HOME=') and > :echo luaeval('os.getenv("HOME")') should echo nothing (an empty string) despite exists('$HOME') being true. When setting $HOME to a non-empty string it will be exported to the subprocesses. Note the maximum length of an expanded option is limited. How much depends on the system, mostly it is something like 256 or 1024 characters. *:fix* *:fixdel* :fix[del] Set the value of 't_kD': 't_kb' is 't_kD' becomes ~ CTRL-? CTRL-H not CTRL-? CTRL-? (CTRL-? is 0177 octal, 0x7f hex) {not in Vi} If your delete key terminal code is wrong, but the code for backspace is alright, you can put this in your .vimrc: > :fixdel < This works no matter what the actual code for backspace is. If the backspace key terminal code is wrong you can use this: > :if &term == "termname" : set t_kb=^V<BS> : fixdel :endif < Where "^V" is CTRL-V and "<BS>" is the backspace key (don't type four characters!). Replace "termname" with your terminal name. If your <Delete> key sends a strange key sequence (not CTRL-? or CTRL-H) you cannot use ":fixdel". Then use: > :if &term == "termname" : set t_kD=^V<Delete> :endif < Where "^V" is CTRL-V and "<Delete>" is the delete key (don't type eight characters!). Replace "termname" with your terminal name. *Linux-backspace* Note about Linux: By default the backspace key produces CTRL-?, which is wrong. You can fix it by putting this line in your rc.local: > echo "keycode 14 = BackSpace" | loadkeys < *NetBSD-backspace* Note about NetBSD: If your backspace doesn't produce the right code, try this: > xmodmap -e "keycode 22 = BackSpace" < If this works, add this in your .Xmodmap file: > keysym 22 = BackSpace < You need to restart for this to take effect. ============================================================================== 2. Automatically setting options *auto-setting* Besides changing options with the ":set" command, there are three alternatives to set options automatically for one or more files: 1. When starting Vim initializations are read from various places. See |initialization|. Most of them are performed for all editing sessions, and some of them depend on the directory where Vim is started. You can create an initialization file with |:mkvimrc|, |:mkview| and |:mksession|. 2. If you start editing a new file, the automatic commands are executed. This can be used to set options for files matching a particular pattern and many other things. See |autocommand|. 3. If you start editing a new file, and the 'modeline' option is on, a number of lines at the beginning and end of the file are checked for modelines. This is explained here. *modeline* *vim:* *vi:* *ex:* *E520* There are two forms of modelines. The first form: [text]{white}{vi:|vim:|ex:}[white]{options} [text] any text or empty {white} at least one blank character (<Space> or <Tab>) {vi:|vim:|ex:} the string "vi:", "vim:" or "ex:" [white] optional white space {options} a list of option settings, separated with white space or ':', where each part between ':' is the argument for a ":set" command (can be empty) Examples: vi:noai:sw=3 ts=6 ~ vim: tw=77 ~ The second form (this is compatible with some versions of Vi): [text]{white}{vi:|vim:|Vim:|ex:}[white]se[t] {options}:[text] [text] any text or empty {white} at least one blank character (<Space> or <Tab>) {vi:|vim:|Vim:|ex:} the string "vi:", "vim:", "Vim:" or "ex:" [white] optional white space se[t] the string "set " or "se " (note the space); When "Vim" is used it must be "set". {options} a list of options, separated with white space, which is the argument for a ":set" command : a colon [text] any text or empty Examples: /* vim: set ai tw=75: */ ~ /* Vim: set ai tw=75: */ ~ The white space before {vi:|vim:|Vim:|ex:} is required. This minimizes the chance that a normal word like "lex:" is caught. There is one exception: "vi:" and "vim:" can also be at the start of the line (for compatibility with version 3.0). Using "ex:" at the start of the line will be ignored (this could be short for "example:"). *modeline-local* The options are set like with ":setlocal": The new value only applies to the buffer and window that contain the file. Although it's possible to set global options from a modeline, this is unusual. If you have two windows open and the files in it set the same global option to a different value, the result depends on which one was opened last. When editing a file that was already loaded, only the window-local options from the modeline are used. Thus if you manually changed a buffer-local option after opening the file, it won't be changed if you edit the same buffer in another window. But window-local options will be set. *modeline-version* If the modeline is only to be used for some versions of Vim, the version number can be specified where "vim:" or "Vim:" is used: vim{vers}: version {vers} or later vim<{vers}: version before {vers} vim={vers}: version {vers} vim>{vers}: version after {vers} {vers} is 700 for Vim 7.0 (hundred times the major version plus minor). For example, to use a modeline only for Vim 7.0: /* vim700: set foldmethod=marker */ ~ To use a modeline for Vim after version 7.2: /* vim>702: set cole=2: */ ~ There can be no blanks between "vim" and the ":". The number of lines that are checked can be set with the 'modelines' option. If 'modeline' is off or 'modelines' is 0 no lines are checked. Note that for the first form all of the rest of the line is used, thus a line like: /* vi:ts=4: */ ~ will give an error message for the trailing "*/". This line is OK: /* vi:set ts=4: */ ~ If an error is detected the rest of the line is skipped. If you want to include a ':' in a set command precede it with a '\'. The backslash in front of the ':' will be removed. Example: /* vi:set dir=c\:\tmp: */ ~ This sets the 'dir' option to "c:\tmp". Only a single backslash before the ':' is removed. Thus to include "\:" you have to specify "\\:". *E992* No other commands than "set" are supported, for security reasons (somebody might create a Trojan horse text file with modelines). And not all options can be set. For some options a flag is set, so that when the value is used the |sandbox| is effective. Some options can only be set from the modeline when 'modelineexpr' is set (the default is off). Still, there is always a small risk that a modeline causes trouble. E.g., when some joker sets 'textwidth' to 5 all your lines are wrapped unexpectedly. So disable modelines before editing untrusted text. The mail ftplugin does this, for example. Hint: If you would like to do something else than setting an option, you could define an autocommand that checks the file for a specific string. For example: > au BufReadPost * if getline(1) =~ "VAR" | call SetVar() | endif And define a function SetVar() that does something with the line containing "VAR". ============================================================================== 3. Options summary *option-summary* In the list below all the options are mentioned with their full name and with an abbreviation if there is one. Both forms may be used. In this document when a boolean option is "set" that means that ":set option" is entered. When an option is "reset", ":set nooption" is used. For some options there are two default values: The "Vim default", which is used when 'compatible' is not set, and the "Vi default", which is used when 'compatible' is set. Most options are the same in all windows and buffers. There are a few that are specific to how the text is presented in a window. These can be set to a different value in each window. For example the 'list' option can be set in one window and reset in another for the same text, giving both types of view at the same time. There are a few options that are specific to a certain file. These can have a different value for each file or buffer. For example the 'textwidth' option can be 78 for a normal text file and 0 for a C program. global one option for all buffers and windows local to window each window has its own copy of this option local to buffer each buffer has its own copy of this option When creating a new window the option values from the currently active window are used as a default value for the window-specific options. For the buffer-specific options this depends on the 's' and 'S' flags in the 'cpoptions' option. If 's' is included (which is the default) the values for buffer options are copied from the currently active buffer when a buffer is first entered. If 'S' is present the options are copied each time the buffer is entered, this is almost like having global options. If 's' and 'S' are not present, the options are copied from the currently active buffer when the buffer is created. Hidden options *hidden-options* Not all options are supported in all versions. This depends on the supported features and sometimes on the system. A remark about this is in curly braces below. When an option is not supported it may still be set without getting an error, this is called a hidden option. You can't get the value of a hidden option though, it is not stored. To test if option "foo" can be used with ":set" use something like this: > if exists('&foo') This also returns true for a hidden option. To test if option "foo" is really supported use something like this: > if exists('+foo') < *E355* A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|. *'aleph'* *'al'* *aleph* *Aleph* 'aleph' 'al' number (default 128 for MS-DOS, 224 otherwise) global {not in Vi} {only available when compiled with the |+rightleft| feature} The ASCII code for the first letter of the Hebrew alphabet. The routine that maps the keyboard in Hebrew mode, both in Insert mode (when hkmap is set) and on the command-line (when hitting CTRL-_) outputs the Hebrew characters in the range [aleph..aleph+26]. aleph=128 applies to PC code, and aleph=224 applies to ISO 8859-8. See |rileft.txt|. *'allowrevins'* *'ari'* *'noallowrevins'* *'noari'* 'allowrevins' 'ari' boolean (default off) global {not in Vi} {only available when compiled with the |+rightleft| feature} Allow CTRL-_ in Insert and Command-line mode. This is default off, to avoid that users that accidentally type CTRL-_ instead of SHIFT-_ get into reverse Insert mode, and don't know how to get out. See 'revins'. NOTE: This option is reset when 'compatible' is set. *'altkeymap'* *'akm'* *'noaltkeymap'* *'noakm'* 'altkeymap' 'akm' boolean (default off) global {not in Vi} {only available when compiled with the |+farsi| feature} When on, the second language is Farsi. In editing mode CTRL-_ toggles the keyboard map between Farsi and English, when 'allowrevins' set. When off, the keyboard map toggles between Hebrew and English. This is useful to start the Vim in native mode i.e. English (left-to-right mode) and have default second language Farsi or Hebrew (right-to-left mode). See |farsi.txt|. *'ambiwidth'* *'ambw'* 'ambiwidth' 'ambw' string (default: "single") global {not in Vi} {only available when compiled with the |+multi_byte| feature} Only effective when 'encoding' is "utf-8" or another Unicode encoding. Tells Vim what to do with characters with East Asian Width Class Ambiguous (such as Euro, Registered Sign, Copyright Sign, Greek letters, Cyrillic letters). There are currently two possible values: "single": Use the same width as characters in US-ASCII. This is expected by most users. "double": Use twice the width of ASCII characters. *E834* *E835* The value "double" cannot be used if 'listchars' or 'fillchars' contains a character that would be double width. There are a number of CJK fonts for which the width of glyphs for those characters are solely based on how many octets they take in legacy/traditional CJK encodings. In those encodings, Euro, Registered sign, Greek/Cyrillic letters are represented by two octets, therefore those fonts have "wide" glyphs for them. This is also true of some line drawing characters used to make tables in text file. Therefore, when a CJK font is used for GUI Vim or Vim is running inside a terminal (emulators) that uses a CJK font (or Vim is run inside an xterm invoked with "-cjkwidth" option.), this option should be set to "double" to match the width perceived by Vim with the width of glyphs in the font. Perhaps it also has to be set to "double" under CJK Windows 9x/ME or Windows 2k/XP when the system locale is set to one of CJK locales. See Unicode Standard Annex #11 (http://www.unicode.org/reports/tr11). Vim may set this option automatically at startup time when Vim is compiled with the |+termresponse| feature and if |t_u7| is set to the escape sequence to request cursor position report. The response can be found in |v:termu7resp|. *'antialias'* *'anti'* *'noantialias'* *'noanti'* 'antialias' 'anti' boolean (default: off) global {not in Vi} {only available when compiled with GUI enabled on Mac OS X} This option only has an effect in the GUI version of Vim on Mac OS X v10.2 or later. When on, Vim will use smooth ("antialiased") fonts, which can be easier to read at certain sizes on certain displays. Setting this option can sometimes cause problems if 'guifont' is set to its default (empty string). NOTE: This option is reset when 'compatible' is set. *'autochdir'* *'acd'* *'noautochdir'* *'noacd'* 'autochdir' 'acd' boolean (default off) global {not in Vi} {only available when compiled with it, use exists("+autochdir") to check} When on, Vim will change the current working directory whenever you open a file, switch buffers, delete a buffer or open/close a window. It will change to the directory containing the file which was opened or selected. Note: When this option is on some plugins may not work. *'arabic'* *'arab'* *'noarabic'* *'noarab'* 'arabic' 'arab' boolean (default off) local to window {not in Vi} {only available when compiled with the |+arabic| feature} This option can be set to start editing Arabic text. Setting this option will: - Set the 'rightleft' option, unless 'termbidi' is set. - Set the 'arabicshape' option, unless 'termbidi' is set. - Set the 'keymap' option to "arabic"; in Insert mode CTRL-^ toggles between typing English and Arabic key mapping. - Set the 'delcombine' option Note that 'encoding' must be "utf-8" for working with Arabic text. Resetting this option will: - Reset the 'rightleft' option. - Disable the use of 'keymap' (without changing its value). Note that 'arabicshape' and 'delcombine' are not reset (it is a global option). NOTE: This option is reset when 'compatible' is set. Also see |arabic.txt|. *'arabicshape'* *'arshape'* *'noarabicshape'* *'noarshape'* 'arabicshape' 'arshape' boolean (default on) global {not in Vi} {only available when compiled with the |+arabic| feature} When on and 'termbidi' is off, the required visual character corrections that need to take place for displaying the Arabic language take effect. Shaping, in essence, gets enabled; the term is a broad one which encompasses: a) the changing/morphing of characters based on their location within a word (initial, medial, final and stand-alone). b) the enabling of the ability to compose characters c) the enabling of the required combining of some characters When disabled the display shows each character's true stand-alone form. Arabic is a complex language which requires other settings, for further details see |arabic.txt|. NOTE: This option is set when 'compatible' is set. *'autoindent'* *'ai'* *'noautoindent'* *'noai'* 'autoindent' 'ai' boolean (default off) local to buffer Copy indent from current line when starting a new line (typing <CR> in Insert mode or when using the "o" or "O" command). If you do not type anything on the new line except <BS> or CTRL-D and then type <Esc>, CTRL-O or <CR>, the indent is deleted again. Moving the cursor to another line has the same effect, unless the 'I' flag is included in 'cpoptions'. When autoindent is on, formatting (with the "gq" command or when you reach 'textwidth' in Insert mode) uses the indentation of the first line. When 'smartindent' or 'cindent' is on the indent is changed in a different way. The 'autoindent' option is reset when the 'paste' option is set and restored when 'paste' is reset. {small difference from Vi: After the indent is deleted when typing <Esc> or <CR>, the cursor position when moving up or down is after the deleted indent; Vi puts the cursor somewhere in the deleted indent}. *'autoread'* *'ar'* *'noautoread'* *'noar'* 'autoread' 'ar' boolean (default off) global or local to buffer |global-local| {not in Vi} When a file has been detected to have been changed outside of Vim and it has not been changed inside of Vim, automatically read it again. When the file has been deleted this is not done. |timestamp| If this option has a local value, use this command to switch back to using the global value: > :set autoread< < *'autowrite'* *'aw'* *'noautowrite'* *'noaw'* 'autowrite' 'aw' boolean (default off) global Write the contents of the file, if it has been modified, on each :next, :rewind, :last, :first, :previous, :stop, :suspend, :tag, :!, :make, CTRL-] and CTRL-^ command; and when a :buffer, CTRL-O, CTRL-I, '{A-Z0-9}, or `{A-Z0-9} command takes one to another file. Note that for some commands the 'autowrite' option is not used, see 'autowriteall' for that. *'autowriteall'* *'awa'* *'noautowriteall'* *'noawa'* 'autowriteall' 'awa' boolean (default off) global {not in Vi} Like 'autowrite', but also used for commands ":edit", ":enew", ":quit", ":qall", ":exit", ":xit", ":recover" and closing the Vim window. Setting this option also implies that Vim behaves like 'autowrite' has been set. *'background'* *'bg'* 'background' 'bg' string (default "dark" or "light", see below) global {not in Vi} When set to "dark", Vim will try to use colors that look good on a dark background. When set to "light", Vim will try to use colors that look good on a light background. Any other value is illegal. Vim tries to set the default value according to the terminal used. This will not always be correct. Setting this option does not change the background color, it tells Vim what the background color looks like. For changing the background color, see |:hi-normal|. When 'background' is set Vim will adjust the default color groups for the new value. But the colors used for syntax highlighting will not change. *g:colors_name* When a color scheme is loaded (the "g:colors_name" variable is set) setting 'background' will cause the color scheme to be reloaded. If the color scheme adjusts to the value of 'background' this will work. However, if the color scheme sets 'background' itself the effect may be undone. First delete the "g:colors_name" variable when needed. When setting 'background' to the default value with: > :set background& < Vim will guess the value. In the GUI this should work correctly, in other cases Vim might not be able to guess the right value. When the |t_RB| option is set, Vim will use it to request the background color from the terminal. If the returned RGB value is dark/light and 'background' is not dark/light, 'background' will be set and the screen is redrawn. This may have side effects, make t_BG empty in your .vimrc if you suspect this problem. The response to |t_RB| can be found in |v:termrbgresp|. When starting the GUI, the default value for 'background' will be "light". When the value is not set in the .gvimrc, and Vim detects that the background is actually quite dark, 'background' is set to "dark". But this happens only AFTER the .gvimrc file has been read (because the window needs to be opened to find the actual background color). To get around this, force the GUI window to be opened by putting a ":gui" command in the .gvimrc file, before where the value of 'background' is used (e.g., before ":syntax on"). For MS-DOS, Windows and OS/2 the default is "dark". For other systems "dark" is used when 'term' is "linux", "screen.linux", "cygwin" or "putty", or $COLORFGBG suggests a dark background. Otherwise the default is "light". The |:terminal| command and the |term_start()| function use the 'background' value to decide whether the terminal window will start with a white or black background. Normally this option would be set in the .vimrc file. Possibly depending on the terminal name. Example: > :if &term == "pcterm" : set background=dark :endif < When this option is set, the default settings for the highlight groups will change. To use other settings, place ":highlight" commands AFTER the setting of the 'background' option. This option is also used in the "$VIMRUNTIME/syntax/syntax.vim" file to select the colors for syntax highlighting. After changing this option, you must load syntax.vim again to see the result. This can be done with ":syntax on". *'backspace'* *'bs'* 'backspace' 'bs' string (default "", set to "indent,eol,start" in |defaults.vim|) global {not in Vi} Influences the working of <BS>, <Del>, CTRL-W and CTRL-U in Insert mode. This is a list of items, separated by commas. Each item allows a way to backspace over something: value effect ~ indent allow backspacing over autoindent eol allow backspacing over line breaks (join lines) start allow backspacing over the start of insert; CTRL-W and CTRL-U stop once at the start of insert. When the value is empty, Vi compatible backspacing is used. For backwards compatibility with version 5.4 and earlier: value effect ~ 0 same as ":set backspace=" (Vi compatible) 1 same as ":set backspace=indent,eol" 2 same as ":set backspace=indent,eol,start" See |:fixdel| if your <BS> or <Del> key does not do what you want. NOTE: This option is set to "" when 'compatible' is set. *'backup'* *'bk'* *'nobackup'* *'nobk'* 'backup' 'bk' boolean (default off) global {not in Vi} Make a backup before overwriting a file. Leave it around after the file has been successfully written. If you do not want to keep the backup file, but you do want a backup while the file is being written, reset this option and set the 'writebackup' option (this is the default). If you do not want a backup file at all reset both options (use this if your file system is almost full). See the |backup-table| for more explanations. When the 'backupskip' pattern matches, a backup is not made anyway. When 'patchmode' is set, the backup may be renamed to become the oldest version of a file. NOTE: This option is reset when 'compatible' is set. *'backupcopy'* *'bkc'* 'backupcopy' 'bkc' string (Vi default for Unix: "yes", otherwise: "auto") global or local to buffer |global-local| {not in Vi} When writing a file and a backup is made, this option tells how it's done. This is a comma separated list of words. The main values are: "yes" make a copy of the file and overwrite the original one "no" rename the file and write a new one "auto" one of the previous, what works best Extra values that can be combined with the ones above are: "breaksymlink" always break symlinks when writing "breakhardlink" always break hardlinks when writing Making a copy and overwriting the original file: - Takes extra time to copy the file. + When the file has special attributes, is a (hard/symbolic) link or has a resource fork, all this is preserved. - When the file is a link the backup will have the name of the link, not of the real file. Renaming the file and writing a new one: + It's fast. - Sometimes not all attributes of the file can be copied to the new file. - When the file is a link the new file will not be a link. The "auto" value is the middle way: When Vim sees that renaming file is possible without side effects (the attributes can be passed on and the file is not a link) that is used. When problems are expected, a copy will be made. The "breaksymlink" and "breakhardlink" values can be used in combination with any of "yes", "no" and "auto". When included, they force Vim to always break either symbolic or hard links by doing exactly what the "no" option does, renaming the original file to become the backup and writing a new file in its place. This can be useful for example in source trees where all the files are symbolic or hard links and any changes should stay in the local source tree, not be propagated back to the original source. *crontab* One situation where "no" and "auto" will cause problems: A program that opens a file, invokes Vim to edit that file, and then tests if the open file was changed (through the file descriptor) will check the backup file instead of the newly created file. "crontab -e" is an example. When a copy is made, the original file is truncated and then filled with the new text. This means that protection bits, owner and symbolic links of the original file are unmodified. The backup file however, is a new file, owned by the user who edited the file. The group of the backup is set to the group of the original file. If this fails, the protection bits for the group are made the same as for others. When the file is renamed this is the other way around: The backup has the same attributes of the original file, and the newly written file is owned by the current user. When the file was a (hard/symbolic) link, the new file will not! That's why the "auto" value doesn't rename when the file is a link. The owner and group of the newly written file will be set to the same ones as the original file, but the system may refuse to do this. In that case the "auto" value will again not rename the file. NOTE: This option is set to the Vi default value when 'compatible' is set and to the Vim default value when 'compatible' is reset. *'backupdir'* *'bdir'* 'backupdir' 'bdir' string (default for Amiga: ".,t:", for MS-DOS and Win32: ".,$TEMP,c:/tmp,c:/temp" for Unix: ".,~/tmp,~/") global {not in Vi} List of directories for the backup file, separated with commas. - The backup file will be created in the first directory in the list where this is possible. The directory must exist, Vim will not create it for you. - Empty means that no backup file will be created ('patchmode' is impossible!). Writing may fail because of this. - A directory "." means to put the backup file in the same directory as the edited file. - A directory starting with "./" (or ".\" for MS-DOS et al.) means to put the backup file relative to where the edited file is. The leading "." is replaced with the path name of the edited file. ("." inside a directory name has no special meaning). - Spaces after the comma are ignored, other spaces are considered part of the directory name. To have a space at the start of a directory name, precede it with a backslash. - To include a comma in a directory name precede it with a backslash. - A directory name may end in an '/'. - Environment variables are expanded |:set_env|. - Careful with '\' characters, type one before a space, type two to get one in the option (see |option-backslash|), for example: > :set bdir=c:\\tmp,\ dir\\,with\\,commas,\\\ dir\ with\ spaces < - For backwards compatibility with Vim version 3.0 a '>' at the start of the option is removed. See also 'backup' and 'writebackup' options. If you want to hide your backup files on Unix, consider this value: > :set backupdir=./.backup,~/.backup,.,/tmp < You must create a ".backup" directory in each directory and in your home directory for this to work properly. The use of |:set+=| and |:set-=| is preferred when adding or removing directories from the list. This avoids problems when a future version uses another default. This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for security reasons. *'backupext'* *'bex'* *E589* 'backupext' 'bex' string (default "~", for VMS: "_") global {not in Vi} String which is appended to a file name to make the name of the backup file. The default is quite unusual, because this avoids accidentally overwriting existing files with a backup file. You might prefer using ".bak", but make sure that you don't have files with ".bak" that you want to keep. Only normal file name characters can be used, "/\*?[|<>" are illegal. If you like to keep a lot of backups, you could use a BufWritePre autocommand to change 'backupext' just before writing the file to include a timestamp. > :au BufWritePre * let &bex = '-' . strftime("%Y%b%d%X") . '~' < Use 'backupdir' to put the backup in a different directory. *'backupskip'* *'bsk'* 'backupskip' 'bsk' string (default: "$TMPDIR/*,$TMP/*,$TEMP/*" Unix: "/tmp/*,$TMPDIR/*,$TMP/*,$TEMP/*" Mac: "/private/tmp/*,$TMPDIR/*,$TMP/*,$TEMP/*") global {not in Vi} {not available when compiled without the |+wildignore| feature} A list of file patterns. When one of the patterns matches with the name of the file which is written, no backup file is created. Both the specified file name and the full path name of the file are used. The pattern is used like with |:autocmd|, see |autocmd-patterns|. Watch out for special characters, see |option-backslash|. When $TMPDIR, $TMP or $TEMP is not defined, it is not used for the default value. "/tmp/*" is only used for Unix. WARNING: Not having a backup file means that when Vim fails to write your buffer correctly and then, for whatever reason, Vim exits, you lose both the original file and what you were writing. Only disable backups if you don't care about losing the file. Note that environment variables are not expanded. If you want to use $HOME you must expand it explicitly, e.g.: > :let &backupskip = escape(expand('$HOME'), '\') . '/tmp/*' < Note that the default also makes sure that "crontab -e" works (when a backup would be made by renaming the original file crontab won't see the newly created file). Also see 'backupcopy' and |crontab|. *'balloondelay'* *'bdlay'* 'balloondelay' 'bdlay' number (default: 600) global {not in Vi} {only available when compiled with the |+balloon_eval| feature} Delay in milliseconds before a balloon may pop up. See |balloon-eval|. *'ballooneval'* *'beval'* *'noballooneval'* *'nobeval'* 'ballooneval' 'beval' boolean (default off) global {not in Vi} {only available when compiled with the |+balloon_eval| feature} Switch on the |balloon-eval| functionality for the GUI. *'balloonevalterm'* *'bevalterm'* *'noballoonevalterm'* *'nobevalterm'* 'balloonevalterm' 'bevalterm' boolean (default off) global {not in Vi} {only available when compiled with the |+balloon_eval_term| feature} Switch on the |balloon-eval| functionality for the terminal. *'balloonexpr'* *'bexpr'* 'balloonexpr' 'bexpr' string (default "") global or local to buffer |global-local| {not in Vi} {only available when compiled with the |+balloon_eval| feature} Expression for text to show in evaluation balloon. It is only used when 'ballooneval' is on. These variables can be used: v:beval_bufnr number of the buffer in which balloon is going to show v:beval_winnr number of the window v:beval_winid ID of the window v:beval_lnum line number v:beval_col column number (byte index) v:beval_text word under or after the mouse pointer The evaluation of the expression must not have side effects! Example: > function! MyBalloonExpr() return 'Cursor is at line ' . v:beval_lnum . \', column ' . v:beval_col . \ ' of file ' . bufname(v:beval_bufnr) . \ ' on word "' . v:beval_text . '"' endfunction set bexpr=MyBalloonExpr() set ballooneval < Also see |balloon_show()|, can be used if the content of the balloon is to be fetched asynchronously. NOTE: The balloon is displayed only if the cursor is on a text character. If the result of evaluating 'balloonexpr' is not empty, Vim does not try to send a message to an external debugger (Netbeans or Sun Workshop). The expression will be evaluated in the |sandbox| when set from a modeline, see |sandbox-option|. This option cannot be set in a modeline when 'modelineexpr' is off. It is not allowed to change text or jump to another window while evaluating 'balloonexpr' |textlock|. To check whether line breaks in the balloon text work use this check: > if has("balloon_multiline") < When they are supported "\n" characters will start a new line. If the expression evaluates to a |List| this is equal to using each List item as a string and putting "\n" in between them. NOTE: This option is set to "" when 'compatible' is set. *'belloff'* *'bo'* 'belloff' 'bo' string (default "") global {not in Vi} Specifies for which events the bell will not be rung. It is a comma separated list of items. For each item that is present, the bell will be silenced. This is most useful to specify specific events in insert mode to be silenced. item meaning when present ~ all All events. backspace When hitting <BS> or <Del> and deleting results in an error. cursor Fail to move around using the cursor keys or <PageUp>/<PageDown> in |Insert-mode|. complete Error occurred when using |i_CTRL-X_CTRL-K| or |i_CTRL-X_CTRL-T|. copy Cannot copy char from insert mode using |i_CTRL-Y| or |i_CTRL-E|. ctrlg Unknown Char after <C-G> in Insert mode. error Other Error occurred (e.g. try to join last line) (mostly used in |Normal-mode| or |Cmdline-mode|). esc hitting <Esc> in |Normal-mode|. ex In |Visual-mode|, hitting |Q| results in an error. hangul Error occurred when using hangul input. insertmode Pressing <Esc> in 'insertmode'. lang Calling the beep module for Lua/Mzscheme/TCL. mess No output available for |g<|. showmatch Error occurred for 'showmatch' function. operator Empty region error |cpo-E|. register Unknown register after <C-R> in |Insert-mode|. shell Bell from shell output |:!|. spell Error happened on spell suggest. wildmode More matches in |cmdline-completion| available (depends on the 'wildmode' setting). This is most useful to fine tune when in Insert mode the bell should be rung. For Normal mode and Ex commands, the bell is often rung to indicate that an error occurred. It can be silenced by adding the "error" keyword. *'binary'* *'bin'* *'nobinary'* *'nobin'* 'binary' 'bin' boolean (default off) local to buffer {not in Vi} This option should be set before editing a binary file. You can also use the |-b| Vim argument. When this option is switched on a few options will be changed (also when it already was on): 'textwidth' will be set to 0 'wrapmargin' will be set to 0 'modeline' will be off 'expandtab' will be off Also, 'fileformat' and 'fileformats' options will not be used, the file is read and written like 'fileformat' was "unix" (a single <NL> separates lines). The 'fileencoding' and 'fileencodings' options will not be used, the file is read without conversion. NOTE: When you start editing a(nother) file while the 'bin' option is on, settings from autocommands may change the settings again (e.g., 'textwidth'), causing trouble when editing. You might want to set 'bin' again when the file has been loaded. The previous values of these options are remembered and restored when 'bin' is switched from on to off. Each buffer has its own set of saved option values. To edit a file with 'binary' set you can use the |++bin| argument. This avoids you have to do ":set bin", which would have effect for all files you edit. When writing a file the <EOL> for the last line is only written if there was one in the original file (normally Vim appends an <EOL> to the last line if there is none; this would make the file longer). See the 'endofline' option. *'bioskey'* *'biosk'* *'nobioskey'* *'nobiosk'* 'bioskey' 'biosk' boolean (default on) global {not in Vi} {only for MS-DOS} This was for MS-DOS and is no longer supported. *'bomb'* *'nobomb'* 'bomb' boolean (default off) local to buffer {not in Vi} {only available when compiled with the |+multi_byte| feature} When writing a file and the following conditions are met, a BOM (Byte Order Mark) is prepended to the file: - this option is on - the 'binary' option is off - 'fileencoding' is "utf-8", "ucs-2", "ucs-4" or one of the little/big endian variants. Some applications use the BOM to recognize the encoding of the file. Often used for UCS-2 files on MS-Windows. For other applications it causes trouble, for example: "cat file1 file2" makes the BOM of file2 appear halfway the resulting file. Gcc doesn't accept a BOM. When Vim reads a file and 'fileencodings' starts with "ucs-bom", a check for the presence of the BOM is done and 'bomb' set accordingly. Unless 'binary' is set, it is removed from the first line, so that you don't see it when editing. When you don't change the options, the BOM will be restored when writing the file. *'breakat'* *'brk'* 'breakat' 'brk' string (default " ^I!@*-+;:,./?") global {not in Vi} {not available when compiled without the |+linebreak| feature} This option lets you choose which characters might cause a line break if 'linebreak' is on. Only works for ASCII and also for 8-bit characters when 'encoding' is an 8-bit encoding. *'breakindent'* *'bri'* *'nobreakindent'* *'nobri'* 'breakindent' 'bri' boolean (default off) local to window {not in Vi} {not available when compiled without the |+linebreak| feature} Every wrapped line will continue visually indented (same amount of space as the beginning of that line), thus preserving horizontal blocks of text. NOTE: This option is reset when 'compatible' is set. *'breakindentopt'* *'briopt'* 'breakindentopt' 'briopt' string (default empty) local to window {not in Vi} {not available when compiled without the |+linebreak| feature} Settings for 'breakindent'. It can consist of the following optional items and must be separated by a comma: min:{n} Minimum text width that will be kept after applying 'breakindent', even if the resulting text should normally be narrower. This prevents text indented almost to the right window border occupying lot of vertical space when broken. shift:{n} After applying 'breakindent', the wrapped line's beginning will be shifted by the given number of characters. It permits dynamic French paragraph indentation (negative) or emphasizing the line continuation (positive). sbr Display the 'showbreak' value before applying the additional indent. The default value for min is 20 and shift is 0. *'browsedir'* *'bsdir'* 'browsedir' 'bsdir' string (default: "last") global {not in Vi} {only for Motif, Athena, GTK, Mac and Win32 GUI} Which directory to use for the file browser: last Use same directory as with last file browser, where a file was opened or saved. buffer Use the directory of the related buffer. current Use the current directory. {path} Use the specified directory *'bufhidden'* *'bh'* 'bufhidden' 'bh' string (default: "") local to buffer {not in Vi} This option specifies what happens when a buffer is no longer displayed in a window: <empty> follow the global 'hidden' option hide hide the buffer (don't unload it), also when 'hidden' is not set unload unload the buffer, also when 'hidden' is set or using |:hide| delete delete the buffer from the buffer list, also when 'hidden' is set or using |:hide|, like using |:bdelete| wipe wipe out the buffer from the buffer list, also when 'hidden' is set or using |:hide|, like using |:bwipeout| CAREFUL: when "unload", "delete" or "wipe" is used changes in a buffer are lost without a warning. Also, these values may break autocommands that switch between buffers temporarily. This option is used together with 'buftype' and 'swapfile' to specify special kinds of buffers. See |special-buffers|. *'buflisted'* *'bl'* *'nobuflisted'* *'nobl'* *E85* 'buflisted' 'bl' boolean (default: on) local to buffer {not in Vi} When this option is set, the buffer shows up in the buffer list. If it is reset it is not used for ":bnext", "ls", the Buffers menu, etc. This option is reset by Vim for buffers that are only used to remember a file name or marks. Vim sets it when starting to edit a buffer. But not when moving to a buffer with ":buffer". *'buftype'* *'bt'* *E382* 'buftype' 'bt' string (default: "") local to buffer {not in Vi} The value of this option specifies the type of a buffer: <empty> normal buffer nofile buffer which is not related to a file and will not be written nowrite buffer which will not be written acwrite buffer which will always be written with BufWriteCmd autocommands. quickfix quickfix buffer, contains list of errors |:cwindow| or list of locations |:lwindow| help help buffer (you are not supposed to set this manually) terminal buffer for a |terminal| (you are not supposed to set this manually) This option is used together with 'bufhidden' and 'swapfile' to specify special kinds of buffers. See |special-buffers|. Be careful with changing this option, it can have many side effects! A "quickfix" buffer is only used for the error list and the location list. This value is set by the |:cwindow| and |:lwindow| commands and you are not supposed to change it. "nofile" and "nowrite" buffers are similar: both: The buffer is not to be written to disk, ":w" doesn't work (":w filename" does work though). both: The buffer is never considered to be |'modified'|. There is no warning when the changes will be lost, for example when you quit Vim. both: A swap file is only created when using too much memory (when 'swapfile' has been reset there is never a swap file). nofile only: The buffer name is fixed, it is not handled like a file name. It is not modified in response to a |:cd| command. both: When using ":e bufname" and already editing "bufname" the buffer is made empty and autocommands are triggered as usual for |:edit|. *E676* "acwrite" implies that the buffer name is not related to a file, like "nofile", but it will be written. Thus, in contrast to "nofile" and "nowrite", ":w" does work and a modified buffer can't be abandoned without saving. For writing there must be matching |BufWriteCmd|, |FileWriteCmd| or |FileAppendCmd| autocommands. *'casemap'* *'cmp'* 'casemap' 'cmp' string (default: "internal,keepascii") global {not in Vi} {only available when compiled with the |+multi_byte| feature} Specifies details about changing the case of letters. It may contain these words, separated by a comma: internal Use internal case mapping functions, the current locale does not change the case mapping. This only matters when 'encoding' is a Unicode encoding, "latin1" or "iso-8859-15". When "internal" is omitted, the towupper() and towlower() system library functions are used when available. keepascii For the ASCII characters (0x00 to 0x7f) use the US case mapping, the current locale is not effective. This probably only matters for Turkish. *'cdpath'* *'cd'* *E344* *E346* 'cdpath' 'cd' string (default: equivalent to $CDPATH or ",,") global {not in Vi} {not available when compiled without the |+file_in_path| feature} This is a list of directories which will be searched when using the |:cd| and |:lcd| commands, provided that the directory being searched for has a relative path, not an absolute part starting with "/", "./" or "../", the 'cdpath' option is not used then. The 'cdpath' option's value has the same form and semantics as |'path'|. Also see |file-searching|. The default value is taken from $CDPATH, with a "," prepended to look in the current directory first. If the default value taken from $CDPATH is not what you want, include a modified version of the following command in your vimrc file to override it: > :let &cdpath = ',' . substitute(substitute($CDPATH, '[, ]', '\\\0', 'g'), ':', ',', 'g') < This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for security reasons. (parts of 'cdpath' can be passed to the shell to expand file names). *'cedit'* 'cedit' string (Vi default: "", Vim default: CTRL-F) global {not in Vi} {not available when compiled without the |+vertsplit| feature} The key used in Command-line Mode to open the command-line window. The default is CTRL-F when 'compatible' is off. Only non-printable keys are allowed. The key can be specified as a single character, but it is difficult to type. The preferred way is to use the <> notation. Examples: > :exe "set cedit=\<C-Y>" :exe "set cedit=\<Esc>" < |Nvi| also has this option, but it only uses the first character. See |cmdwin|. NOTE: This option is set to the Vim default value when 'compatible' is reset. *'charconvert'* *'ccv'* *E202* *E214* *E513* 'charconvert' 'ccv' string (default "") global {only available when compiled with the |+multi_byte| and |+eval| features} {not in Vi} An expression that is used for character encoding conversion. It is evaluated when a file that is to be read or has been written has a different encoding from what is desired. 'charconvert' is not used when the internal iconv() function is supported and is able to do the conversion. Using iconv() is preferred, because it is much faster. 'charconvert' is not used when reading stdin |--|, because there is no file to convert from. You will have to save the text in a file first. The expression must return zero or an empty string for success, non-zero for failure. The possible encoding names encountered are in 'encoding'. Additionally, names given in 'fileencodings' and 'fileencoding' are used. Conversion between "latin1", "unicode", "ucs-2", "ucs-4" and "utf-8" is done internally by Vim, 'charconvert' is not used for this. 'charconvert' is also used to convert the viminfo file, if the 'c' flag is present in 'viminfo'. Also used for Unicode conversion. Example: > set charconvert=CharConvert() fun CharConvert() system("recode " \ . v:charconvert_from . ".." . v:charconvert_to \ . " <" . v:fname_in . " >" v:fname_out) return v:shell_error endfun < The related Vim variables are: v:charconvert_from name of the current encoding v:charconvert_to name of the desired encoding v:fname_in name of the input file v:fname_out name of the output file Note that v:fname_in and v:fname_out will never be the same. Note that v:charconvert_from and v:charconvert_to may be different from 'encoding'. Vim internally uses UTF-8 instead of UCS-2 or UCS-4. Encryption is not done by Vim when using 'charconvert'. If you want to encrypt the file after conversion, 'charconvert' should take care of this. This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for security reasons. *'cindent'* *'cin'* *'nocindent'* *'nocin'* 'cindent' 'cin' boolean (default off) local to buffer {not in Vi} {not available when compiled without the |+cindent| feature} Enables automatic C program indenting. See 'cinkeys' to set the keys that trigger reindenting in insert mode and 'cinoptions' to set your preferred indent style. If 'indentexpr' is not empty, it overrules 'cindent'. If 'lisp' is not on and both 'indentexpr' and 'equalprg' are empty, the "=" operator indents using this algorithm rather than calling an external program. See |C-indenting|. When you don't like the way 'cindent' works, try the 'smartindent' option or 'indentexpr'. This option is not used when 'paste' is set. NOTE: This option is reset when 'compatible' is set. *'cinkeys'* *'cink'* 'cinkeys' 'cink' string (default "0{,0},0),:,0#,!^F,o,O,e") local to buffer {not in Vi} {not available when compiled without the |+cindent| feature} A list of keys that, when typed in Insert mode, cause reindenting of the current line. Only used if 'cindent' is on and 'indentexpr' is empty. For the format of this option see |cinkeys-format|. See |C-indenting|. *'cinoptions'* *'cino'* 'cinoptions' 'cino' string (default "") local to buffer {not in Vi} {not available when compiled without the |+cindent| feature} The 'cinoptions' affect the way 'cindent' reindents lines in a C program. See |cinoptions-values| for the values of this option, and |C-indenting| for info on C indenting in general. *'cinwords'* *'cinw'* 'cinwords' 'cinw' string (default "if,else,while,do,for,switch") local to buffer {not in Vi} {not available when compiled without both the |+cindent| and the |+smartindent| features} These keywords start an extra indent in the next line when 'smartindent' or 'cindent' is set. For 'cindent' this is only done at an appropriate place (inside {}). Note that 'ignorecase' isn't used for 'cinwords'. If case doesn't matter, include the keyword both the uppercase and lowercase: "if,If,IF". *'clipboard'* *'cb'* 'clipboard' 'cb' string (default "autoselect,exclude:cons\|linux" for X-windows, "" otherwise) global {not in Vi} {only in GUI versions or when the |+xterm_clipboard| feature is included} This option is a list of comma separated names. These names are recognized: *clipboard-unnamed* unnamed When included, Vim will use the clipboard register '*' for all yank, delete, change and put operations which would normally go to the unnamed register. When a register is explicitly specified, it will always be used regardless of whether "unnamed" is in 'clipboard' or not. The clipboard register can always be explicitly accessed using the "* notation. Also see |gui-clipboard|. *clipboard-unnamedplus* unnamedplus A variant of the "unnamed" flag which uses the clipboard register '+' (|quoteplus|) instead of register '*' for all yank, delete, change and put operations which would normally go to the unnamed register. When "unnamed" is also included to the option, yank operations (but not delete, change or put) will additionally copy the text into register '*'. Only available with the |+X11| feature. Availability can be checked with: > if has('unnamedplus') < *clipboard-autoselect* autoselect Works like the 'a' flag in 'guioptions': If present, then whenever Visual mode is started, or the Visual area extended, Vim tries to become the owner of the windowing system's global selection or put the selected text on the clipboard used by the selection register "*. See |guioptions_a| and |quotestar| for details. When the GUI is active, the 'a' flag in 'guioptions' is used, when the GUI is not active, this "autoselect" flag is used. Also applies to the modeless selection. *clipboard-autoselectplus* autoselectplus Like "autoselect" but using the + register instead of the * register. Compare to the 'P' flag in 'guioptions'. *clipboard-autoselectml* autoselectml Like "autoselect", but for the modeless selection only. Compare to the 'A' flag in 'guioptions'. *clipboard-html* html When the clipboard contains HTML, use this when pasting. When putting text on the clipboard, mark it as HTML. This works to copy rendered HTML from Firefox, paste it as raw HTML in Vim, select the HTML in Vim and paste it in a rich edit box in Firefox. You probably want to add this only temporarily, possibly use BufEnter autocommands. Only supported for GTK version 2 and later. Only available with the |+multi_byte| feature. *clipboard-exclude* exclude:{pattern} Defines a pattern that is matched against the name of the terminal 'term'. If there is a match, no connection will be made to the X server. This is useful in this situation: - Running Vim in a console. - $DISPLAY is set to start applications on another display. - You do not want to connect to the X server in the console, but do want this in a terminal emulator. To never connect to the X server use: > exclude:.* < This has the same effect as using the |-X| argument. Note that when there is no connection to the X server the window title won't be restored and the clipboard cannot be accessed. The value of 'magic' is ignored, {pattern} is interpreted as if 'magic' was on. The rest of the option value will be used for {pattern}, this must be the last entry. *'cmdheight'* *'ch'* 'cmdheight' 'ch' number (default 1) global {not in Vi} Number of screen lines to use for the command-line. Helps avoiding |hit-enter| prompts. The value of this option is stored with the tab page, so that each tab page can have a different value. *'cmdwinheight'* *'cwh'* 'cmdwinheight' 'cwh' number (default 7) global {not in Vi} {not available when compiled without the |+vertsplit| feature} Number of screen lines to use for the command-line window. |cmdwin| *'colorcolumn'* *'cc'* 'colorcolumn' 'cc' string (default "") local to window {not in Vi} {not available when compiled without the |+syntax| feature} 'colorcolumn' is a comma separated list of screen columns that are highlighted with ColorColumn |hl-ColorColumn|. Useful to align text. Will make screen redrawing slower. The screen column can be an absolute number, or a number preceded with '+' or '-', which is added to or subtracted from 'textwidth'. > :set cc=+1 " highlight column after 'textwidth' :set cc=+1,+2,+3 " highlight three columns after 'textwidth' :hi ColorColumn ctermbg=lightgrey guibg=lightgrey < When 'textwidth' is zero then the items with '-' and '+' are not used. A maximum of 256 columns are highlighted. *'columns'* *'co'* *E594* 'columns' 'co' number (default 80 or terminal width) global {not in Vi} Number of columns of the screen. Normally this is set by the terminal initialization and does not have to be set by hand. Also see |posix-screen-size|. When Vim is running in the GUI or in a resizable window, setting this option will cause the window size to be changed. When you only want to use the size for the GUI, put the command in your |gvimrc| file. When you set this option and Vim is unable to change the physical number of columns of the display, the display may be messed up. For the GUI it is always possible and Vim limits the number of columns to what fits on the screen. You can use this command to get the widest window possible: > :set columns=9999 < Minimum value is 12, maximum value is 10000. *'comments'* *'com'* *E524* *E525* 'comments' 'com' string (default "s1:/*,mb:*,ex:*/,://,b:#,:%,:XCOMM,n:>,fb:-") local to buffer {not in Vi} {not available when compiled without the |+comments| feature} A comma separated list of strings that can start a comment line. See |format-comments|. See |option-backslash| about using backslashes to insert a space. *'commentstring'* *'cms'* *E537* 'commentstring' 'cms' string (default "/*%s*/") local to buffer {not in Vi} {not available when compiled without the |+folding| feature} A template for a comment. The "%s" in the value is replaced with the comment text. Currently only used to add markers for folding, see |fold-marker|. *'compatible'* *'cp'* *'nocompatible'* *'nocp'* 'compatible' 'cp' boolean (default on, off when a |vimrc| or |gvimrc| file is found, reset in |defaults.vim|) global {not in Vi} This option has the effect of making Vim either more Vi-compatible, or make Vim behave in a more useful way. This is a special kind of option, because when it's set or reset, other options are also changed as a side effect. NOTE: Setting or resetting this option can have a lot of unexpected effects: Mappings are interpreted in another way, undo behaves differently, etc. If you set this option in your vimrc file, you should probably put it at the very start. By default this option is on and the Vi defaults are used for the options. This default was chosen for those people who want to use Vim just like Vi, and don't even (want to) know about the 'compatible' option. When a |vimrc| or |gvimrc| file is found while Vim is starting up, this option is switched off, and all options that have not been modified will be set to the Vim defaults. Effectively, this means that when a |vimrc| or |gvimrc| file exists, Vim will use the Vim defaults, otherwise it will use the Vi defaults. (Note: This doesn't happen for the system-wide vimrc or gvimrc file, nor for a file given with the |-u| argument). Also see |compatible-default| and |posix-compliance|. You can also set this option with the "-C" argument, and reset it with "-N". See |-C| and |-N|. See 'cpoptions' for more fine tuning of Vi compatibility. When this option is set, numerous other options are set to make Vim as Vi-compatible as possible. When this option is unset, various options are set to make Vim more useful. The table below lists all the options affected. The {?} column indicates when the options are affected: + Means that the option is set to the value given in {set value} when 'compatible' is set. & Means that the option is set to the value given in {set value} when 'compatible' is set AND is set to its Vim default value when 'compatible' is unset. - Means the option is NOT changed when setting 'compatible' but IS set to its Vim default when 'compatible' is unset. The {effect} column summarises the change when 'compatible' is set. option ? set value effect ~ 'allowrevins' + off no CTRL-_ command 'antialias' + off don't use antialiased fonts 'arabic' + off reset arabic-related options 'arabicshape' + on correct character shapes 'backspace' + "" normal backspace 'backup' + off no backup file 'backupcopy' & Unix: "yes" backup file is a copy else: "auto" copy or rename backup file 'balloonexpr' + "" text to show in evaluation balloon 'breakindent' + off don't indent when wrapping lines 'cedit' - {unchanged} {set vim default only on resetting 'cp'} 'cindent' + off no C code indentation 'compatible' - {unchanged} {set vim default only on resetting 'cp'} 'copyindent' + off don't copy indent structure 'cpoptions' & (all flags) Vi-compatible flags 'cscopepathcomp'+ 0 don't show directories in tags list 'cscoperelative'+ off don't use basename of path as prefix 'cscopetag' + off don't use cscope for ":tag" 'cscopetagorder'+ 0 see |cscopetagorder| 'cscopeverbose' + off see |cscopeverbose| 'delcombine' + off unicode: delete whole char combination 'digraph' + off no digraphs 'esckeys' & off no <Esc>-keys in Insert mode 'expandtab' + off tabs not expanded to spaces 'fileformats' & "" no automatic file format detection, "dos,unix" except for DOS, Windows and OS/2 'formatexpr' + "" use 'formatprg' for auto-formatting 'formatoptions' & "vt" Vi compatible formatting 'gdefault' + off no default 'g' flag for ":s" 'history' & 0 no commandline history 'hkmap' + off no Hebrew keyboard mapping 'hkmapp' + off no phonetic Hebrew keyboard mapping 'hlsearch' + off no highlighting of search matches 'incsearch' + off no incremental searching 'indentexpr' + "" no indenting by expression 'insertmode' + off do not start in Insert mode 'iskeyword' & "@,48-57,_" keywords contain alphanumeric characters and '_' 'joinspaces' + on insert 2 spaces after period 'modeline' & off no modelines 'more' & off no pauses in listings 'mzquantum' - {unchanged} {set vim default only on resetting 'cp'} 'numberwidth' & 8 min number of columns for line number 'preserveindent'+ off don't preserve current indent structure when changing it 'revins' + off no reverse insert 'ruler' + off no ruler 'scrolljump' + 1 no jump scroll 'scrolloff' + 0 no scroll offset 'shelltemp' - {unchanged} {set vim default only on resetting 'cp'} 'shiftround' + off indent not rounded to shiftwidth 'shortmess' & "" no shortening of messages 'showcmd' & off command characters not shown 'showmode' & off current mode not shown 'sidescrolloff' + 0 cursor moves to edge of screen in scroll 'smartcase' + off no automatic ignore case switch 'smartindent' + off no smart indentation 'smarttab' + off no smart tab size 'softtabstop' + 0 tabs are always 'tabstop' positions 'startofline' + on goto startofline with some commands 'tagcase' & "followic" 'ignorecase' when searching tags file 'tagrelative' & off tag file names are not relative 'termguicolors' + off don't use highlight-(guifg|guibg) 'textauto' & off no automatic textmode detection 'textwidth' + 0 no automatic line wrap 'tildeop' + off tilde is not an operator 'ttimeout' + off no terminal timeout 'undofile' + off don't use an undo file 'viminfo' - {unchanged} {set Vim default only on resetting 'cp'} 'virtualedit' + "" cursor can only be placed on characters 'whichwrap' & "" left-right movements don't wrap 'wildchar' & CTRL-E only when the current value is <Tab> use CTRL-E for cmdline completion 'writebackup' + on or off depends on the |+writebackup| feature *'complete'* *'cpt'* *E535* 'complete' 'cpt' string (default: ".,w,b,u,t,i") local to buffer {not in Vi} This option specifies how keyword completion |ins-completion| works when CTRL-P or CTRL-N are used. It is also used for whole-line completion |i_CTRL-X_CTRL-L|. It indicates the type of completion and the places to scan. It is a comma separated list of flags: . scan the current buffer ('wrapscan' is ignored) w scan buffers from other windows b scan other loaded buffers that are in the buffer list u scan the unloaded buffers that are in the buffer list U scan the buffers that are not in the buffer list k scan the files given with the 'dictionary' option kspell use the currently active spell checking |spell| k{dict} scan the file {dict}. Several "k" flags can be given, patterns are valid too. For example: > :set cpt=k/usr/dict/*,k~/spanish < s scan the files given with the 'thesaurus' option s{tsr} scan the file {tsr}. Several "s" flags can be given, patterns are valid too. i scan current and included files d scan current and included files for defined name or macro |i_CTRL-X_CTRL-D| ] tag completion t same as "]" Unloaded buffers are not loaded, thus their autocmds |:autocmd| are not executed, this may lead to unexpected completions from some files (gzipped files for example). Unloaded buffers are not scanned for whole-line completion. The default is ".,w,b,u,t,i", which means to scan: 1. the current buffer 2. buffers in other windows 3. other loaded buffers 4. unloaded buffers 5. tags 6. included files As you can see, CTRL-N and CTRL-P can be used to do any 'iskeyword'- based expansion (e.g., dictionary |i_CTRL-X_CTRL-K|, included patterns |i_CTRL-X_CTRL-I|, tags |i_CTRL-X_CTRL-]| and normal expansions). This option cannot be set in a modeline when 'modelineexpr' is off. *'completefunc'* *'cfu'* 'completefunc' 'cfu' string (default: empty) local to buffer {not in Vi} {not available when compiled without the |+eval| or |+insert_expand| features} This option specifies a function to be used for Insert mode completion with CTRL-X CTRL-U. |i_CTRL-X_CTRL-U| See |complete-functions| for an explanation of how the function is invoked and what it should return. This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for security reasons. *'completeopt'* *'cot'* 'completeopt' 'cot' string (default: "menu,preview") global {not available when compiled without the |+insert_expand| feature} {not in Vi} A comma separated list of options for Insert mode completion |ins-completion|. The supported values are: menu Use a popup menu to show the possible completions. The menu is only shown when there is more than one match and sufficient colors are available. |ins-completion-menu| menuone Use the popup menu also when there is only one match. Useful when there is additional information about the match, e.g., what file it comes from. longest Only insert the longest common text of the matches. If the menu is displayed you can use CTRL-L to add more characters. Whether case is ignored depends on the kind of completion. For buffer text the 'ignorecase' option is used. preview Show extra information about the currently selected completion in the preview window. Only works in combination with "menu" or "menuone". noinsert Do not insert any text for a match until the user selects a match from the menu. Only works in combination with "menu" or "menuone". No effect if "longest" is present. noselect Do not select a match in the menu, force the user to select one from the menu. Only works in combination with "menu" or "menuone". *'concealcursor'* *'cocu'* 'concealcursor' 'cocu' string (default: "") local to window {not in Vi} {not available when compiled without the |+conceal| feature} Sets the modes in which text in the cursor line can also be concealed. When the current mode is listed then concealing happens just like in other lines. n Normal mode v Visual mode i Insert mode c Command line editing, for 'incsearch' 'v' applies to all lines in the Visual area, not only the cursor. A useful value is "nc". This is used in help files. So long as you are moving around text is concealed, but when starting to insert text or selecting a Visual area the concealed text is displayed, so that you can see what you are doing. Keep in mind that the cursor position is not always where it's displayed. E.g., when moving vertically it may change column. 'conceallevel' 'cole' *'conceallevel'* *'cole'* number (default 0) local to window {not in Vi} {not available when compiled without the |+conceal| feature} Determine how text with the "conceal" syntax attribute |:syn-conceal| is shown: Value Effect ~ 0 Text is shown normally 1 Each block of concealed text is replaced with one character. If the syntax item does not have a custom replacement character defined (see |:syn-cchar|) the character defined in 'listchars' is used (default is a space). It is highlighted with the "Conceal" highlight group. 2 Concealed text is completely hidden unless it has a custom replacement character defined (see |:syn-cchar|). 3 Concealed text is completely hidden. Note: in the cursor line concealed text is not hidden, so that you can edit and copy the text. This can be changed with the 'concealcursor' option. *'confirm'* *'cf'* *'noconfirm'* *'nocf'* 'confirm' 'cf' boolean (default off) global {not in Vi} When 'confirm' is on, certain operations that would normally fail because of unsaved changes to a buffer, e.g. ":q" and ":e", instead raise a |dialog| asking if you wish to save the current file(s). You can still use a ! to unconditionally |abandon| a buffer. If 'confirm' is off you can still activate confirmation for one command only (this is most useful in mappings) with the |:confirm| command. Also see the |confirm()| function and the 'v' flag in 'guioptions'. *'conskey'* *'consk'* *'noconskey'* *'noconsk'* 'conskey' 'consk' boolean (default off) global {not in Vi} {only for MS-DOS} This was for MS-DOS and is no longer supported. *'copyindent'* *'ci'* *'nocopyindent'* *'noci'* 'copyindent' 'ci' boolean (default off) local to buffer {not in Vi} Copy the structure of the existing lines indent when autoindenting a new line. Normally the new indent is reconstructed by a series of tabs followed by spaces as required (unless |'expandtab'| is enabled, in which case only spaces are used). Enabling this option makes the new line copy whatever characters were used for indenting on the existing line. 'expandtab' has no effect on these characters, a Tab remains a Tab. If the new indent is greater than on the existing line, the remaining space is filled in the normal manner. NOTE: This option is reset when 'compatible' is set. Also see 'preserveindent'. *'cpoptions'* *'cpo'* *cpo* 'cpoptions' 'cpo' string (Vim default: "aABceFs", Vi default: all flags) global {not in Vi} A sequence of single character flags. When a character is present this indicates Vi-compatible behavior. This is used for things where not being Vi-compatible is mostly or sometimes preferred. 'cpoptions' stands for "compatible-options". Commas can be added for readability. To avoid problems with flags that are added in the future, use the "+=" and "-=" feature of ":set" |add-option-flags|. NOTE: This option is set to the Vi default value when 'compatible' is set and to the Vim default value when 'compatible' is reset. NOTE: This option is set to the POSIX default value at startup when the Vi default value would be used and the $VIM_POSIX environment variable exists |posix|. This means Vim tries to behave like the POSIX specification. contains behavior ~ *cpo-a* a When included, a ":read" command with a file name argument will set the alternate file name for the current window. *cpo-A* A When included, a ":write" command with a file name argument will set the alternate file name for the current window. *cpo-b* b "\|" in a ":map" command is recognized as the end of the map command. The '\' is included in the mapping, the text after the '|' is interpreted as the next command. Use a CTRL-V instead of a backslash to include the '|' in the mapping. Applies to all mapping, abbreviation, menu and autocmd commands. See also |map_bar|. *cpo-B* B A backslash has no special meaning in mappings, abbreviations and the "to" part of the menu commands. Remove this flag to be able to use a backslash like a CTRL-V. For example, the command ":map X \<Esc>" results in X being mapped to: 'B' included: "\^[" (^[ is a real <Esc>) 'B' excluded: "<Esc>" (5 characters) ('<' excluded in both cases) *cpo-c* c Searching continues at the end of any match at the cursor position, but not further than the start of the next line. When not present searching continues one character from the cursor position. With 'c' "abababababab" only gets three matches when repeating "/abab", without 'c' there are five matches. *cpo-C* C Do not concatenate sourced lines that start with a backslash. See |line-continuation|. *cpo-d* d Using "./" in the 'tags' option doesn't mean to use the tags file relative to the current file, but the tags file in the current directory. *cpo-D* D Can't use CTRL-K to enter a digraph after Normal mode commands with a character argument, like |r|, |f| and |t|. *cpo-e* e When executing a register with ":@r", always add a <CR> to the last line, also when the register is not linewise. If this flag is not present, the register is not linewise and the last line does not end in a <CR>, then the last line is put on the command-line and can be edited before hitting <CR>. *cpo-E* E It is an error when using "y", "d", "c", "g~", "gu" or "gU" on an Empty region. The operators only work when at least one character is to be operate on. Example: This makes "y0" fail in the first column. *cpo-f* f When included, a ":read" command with a file name argument will set the file name for the current buffer, if the current buffer doesn't have a file name yet. *cpo-F* F When included, a ":write" command with a file name argument will set the file name for the current buffer, if the current buffer doesn't have a file name yet. Also see |cpo-P|. *cpo-g* g Goto line 1 when using ":edit" without argument. *cpo-H* H When using "I" on a line with only blanks, insert before the last blank. Without this flag insert after the last blank. *cpo-i* i When included, interrupting the reading of a file will leave it modified. *cpo-I* I When moving the cursor up or down just after inserting indent for 'autoindent', do not delete the indent. *cpo-j* j When joining lines, only add two spaces after a '.', not after '!' or '?'. Also see 'joinspaces'. *cpo-J* J A |sentence| has to be followed by two spaces after the '.', '!' or '?'. A <Tab> is not recognized as white space. *cpo-k* k Disable the recognition of raw key codes in mappings, abbreviations, and the "to" part of menu commands. For example, if <Key> sends ^[OA (where ^[ is <Esc>), the command ":map X ^[OA" results in X being mapped to: 'k' included: "^[OA" (3 characters) 'k' excluded: "<Key>" (one key code) Also see the '<' flag below. *cpo-K* K Don't wait for a key code to complete when it is halfway a mapping. This breaks mapping <F1><F1> when only part of the second <F1> has been read. It enables cancelling the mapping by typing <F1><Esc>. *cpo-l* l Backslash in a [] range in a search pattern is taken literally, only "\]", "\^", "\-" and "\\" are special. See |/[]| 'l' included: "/[ \t]" finds <Space>, '\' and 't' 'l' excluded: "/[ \t]" finds <Space> and <Tab> Also see |cpo-\|. *cpo-L* L When the 'list' option is set, 'wrapmargin', 'textwidth', 'softtabstop' and Virtual Replace mode (see |gR|) count a <Tab> as two characters, instead of the normal behavior of a <Tab>. *cpo-m* m When included, a showmatch will always wait half a second. When not included, a showmatch will wait half a second or until a character is typed. |'showmatch'| *cpo-M* M When excluded, "%" matching will take backslashes into account. Thus in "( \( )" and "\( ( \)" the outer parenthesis match. When included "%" ignores backslashes, which is Vi compatible. *cpo-n* n When included, the column used for 'number' and 'relativenumber' will also be used for text of wrapped lines. *cpo-o* o Line offset to search command is not remembered for next search. *cpo-O* O Don't complain if a file is being overwritten, even when it didn't exist when editing it. This is a protection against a file unexpectedly created by someone else. Vi didn't complain about this. *cpo-p* p Vi compatible Lisp indenting. When not present, a slightly better algorithm is used. *cpo-P* P When included, a ":write" command that appends to a file will set the file name for the current buffer, if the current buffer doesn't have a file name yet and the 'F' flag is also included |cpo-F|. *cpo-q* q When joining multiple lines leave the cursor at the position where it would be when joining two lines. *cpo-r* r Redo ("." command) uses "/" to repeat a search command, instead of the actually used search string. *cpo-R* R Remove marks from filtered lines. Without this flag marks are kept like |:keepmarks| was used. *cpo-s* s Set buffer options when entering the buffer for the first time. This is like it is in Vim version 3.0. And it is the default. If not present the options are set when the buffer is created. *cpo-S* S Set buffer options always when entering a buffer (except 'readonly', 'fileformat', 'filetype' and 'syntax'). This is the (most) Vi compatible setting. The options are set to the values in the current buffer. When you change an option and go to another buffer, the value is copied. Effectively makes the buffer options global to all buffers. 's' 'S' copy buffer options no no when buffer created yes no when buffer first entered (default) X yes each time when buffer entered (vi comp.) *cpo-t* t Search pattern for the tag command is remembered for "n" command. Otherwise Vim only puts the pattern in the history for search pattern, but doesn't change the last used search pattern. *cpo-u* u Undo is Vi compatible. See |undo-two-ways|. *cpo-v* v Backspaced characters remain visible on the screen in Insert mode. Without this flag the characters are erased from the screen right away. With this flag the screen newly typed text overwrites backspaced characters. *cpo-w* w When using "cw" on a blank character, only change one character and not all blanks until the start of the next word. *cpo-W* W Don't overwrite a readonly file. When omitted, ":w!" overwrites a readonly file, if possible. *cpo-x* x <Esc> on the command-line executes the command-line. The default in Vim is to abandon the command-line, because <Esc> normally aborts a command. |c_<Esc>| *cpo-X* X When using a count with "R" the replaced text is deleted only once. Also when repeating "R" with "." and a count. *cpo-y* y A yank command can be redone with ".". *cpo-Z* Z When using "w!" while the 'readonly' option is set, don't reset 'readonly'. *cpo-!* ! When redoing a filter command, use the last used external command, whatever it was. Otherwise the last used -filter- command is used. *cpo-$* $ When making a change to one line, don't redisplay the line, but put a '$' at the end of the changed text. The changed text will be overwritten when you type the new text. The line is redisplayed if you type any command that moves the cursor from the insertion point. *cpo-%* % Vi-compatible matching is done for the "%" command. Does not recognize "#if", "#endif", etc. Does not recognize "/*" and "*/". Parens inside single and double quotes are also counted, causing a string that contains a paren to disturb the matching. For example, in a line like "if (strcmp("foo(", s))" the first paren does not match the last one. When this flag is not included, parens inside single and double quotes are treated specially. When matching a paren outside of quotes, everything inside quotes is ignored. When matching a paren inside quotes, it will find the matching one (if there is one). This works very well for C programs. This flag is also used for other features, such as C-indenting. *cpo--* - When included, a vertical movement command fails when it would go above the first line or below the last line. Without it the cursor moves to the first or last line, unless it already was in that line. Applies to the commands "-", "k", CTRL-P, "+", "j", CTRL-N, CTRL-J and ":1234". *cpo-+* + When included, a ":write file" command will reset the 'modified' flag of the buffer, even though the buffer itself may still be different from its file. *cpo-star* * Use ":*" in the same way as ":@". When not included, ":*" is an alias for ":'<,'>", select the Visual area. *cpo-<* < Disable the recognition of special key codes in |<>| form in mappings, abbreviations, and the "to" part of menu commands. For example, the command ":map X <Tab>" results in X being mapped to: '<' included: "<Tab>" (5 characters) '<' excluded: "^I" (^I is a real <Tab>) Also see the 'k' flag above. *cpo->* > When appending to a register, put a line break before the appended text. *cpo-;* ; When using |,| or |;| to repeat the last |t| search and the cursor is right in front of the searched character, the cursor won't move. When not included, the cursor would skip over it and jump to the following occurrence. POSIX flags. These are not included in the Vi default value, except when $VIM_POSIX was set on startup. |posix| contains behavior ~ *cpo-#* # A count before "D", "o" and "O" has no effect. *cpo-&* & When ":preserve" was used keep the swap file when exiting normally while this buffer is still loaded. This flag is tested when exiting. *cpo-\* \ Backslash in a [] range in a search pattern is taken literally, only "\]" is special See |/[]| '\' included: "/[ \-]" finds <Space>, '\' and '-' '\' excluded: "/[ \-]" finds <Space> and '-' Also see |cpo-l|. *cpo-/* / When "%" is used as the replacement string in a |:s| command, use the previous replacement string. |:s%| *cpo-{* { The |{| and |}| commands also stop at a "{" character at the start of a line. *cpo-.* . The ":chdir" and ":cd" commands fail if the current buffer is modified, unless ! is used. Vim doesn't need this, since it remembers the full path of an opened file. *cpo-bar* | The value of the $LINES and $COLUMNS environment variables overrule the terminal size values obtained with system specific functions. *'cryptmethod'* *'cm'* 'cryptmethod' 'cm' string (default "zip") global or local to buffer |global-local| {not in Vi} Method used for encryption when the buffer is written to a file: *pkzip* zip PkZip compatible method. A weak kind of encryption. Backwards compatible with Vim 7.2 and older. *blowfish* blowfish Blowfish method. Medium strong encryption but it has an implementation flaw. Requires Vim 7.3 or later, files can NOT be read by Vim 7.2 and older. This adds a "seed" to the file, every time you write the file the encrypted bytes will be different. *blowfish2* blowfish2 Blowfish method. Medium strong encryption. Requires Vim 7.4.401 or later, files can NOT be read by Vim 7.3 and older. This adds a "seed" to the file, every time you write the file the encrypted bytes will be different. The whole undo file is encrypted, not just the pieces of text. You should use "blowfish2", also to re-encrypt older files. When reading an encrypted file 'cryptmethod' will be set automatically to the detected method of the file being read. Thus if you write it without changing 'cryptmethod' the same method will be used. Changing 'cryptmethod' does not mark the file as modified, you have to explicitly write it, you don't get a warning unless there are other modifications. Also see |:X|. When setting the global value to an empty string, it will end up with the value "zip". When setting the local value to an empty string the buffer will use the global value. When a new encryption method is added in a later version of Vim, and the current version does not recognize it, you will get *E821* . You need to edit this file with the later version of Vim. *'cscopepathcomp'* *'cspc'* 'cscopepathcomp' 'cspc' number (default 0) global {not available when compiled without the |+cscope| feature} {not in Vi} Determines how many components of the path to show in a list of tags. See |cscopepathcomp|. NOTE: This option is set to 0 when 'compatible' is set. *'cscopeprg'* *'csprg'* 'cscopeprg' 'csprg' string (default "cscope") global {not available when compiled without the |+cscope| feature} {not in Vi} Specifies the command to execute cscope. See |cscopeprg|. This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for security reasons. *'cscopequickfix'* *'csqf'* 'cscopequickfix' 'csqf' string (default "") global {not available when compiled without the |+cscope| or |+quickfix| features} {not in Vi} Specifies whether to use quickfix window to show cscope results. See |cscopequickfix|. *'cscoperelative'* *'csre'* *'nocscoperelative'* *'nocsre'* 'cscoperelative' 'csre' boolean (default off) global {not available when compiled without the |+cscope| feature} {not in Vi} In the absence of a prefix (-P) for cscope. setting this option enables to use the basename of cscope.out path as the prefix. See |cscoperelative|. NOTE: This option is reset when 'compatible' is set. *'cscopetag'* *'cst'* *'nocscopetag'* *'nocst'* 'cscopetag' 'cst' boolean (default off) global {not available when compiled without the |+cscope| feature} {not in Vi} Use cscope for tag commands. See |cscope-options|. NOTE: This option is reset when 'compatible' is set. *'cscopetagorder'* *'csto'* 'cscopetagorder' 'csto' number (default 0) global {not available when compiled without the |+cscope| feature} {not in Vi} Determines the order in which ":cstag" performs a search. See |cscopetagorder|. NOTE: This option is set to 0 when 'compatible' is set. *'cscopeverbose'* *'csverb'* *'nocscopeverbose'* *'nocsverb'* 'cscopeverbose' 'csverb' boolean (default off) global {not available when compiled without the |+cscope| feature} {not in Vi} Give messages when adding a cscope database. See |cscopeverbose|. NOTE: This option is reset when 'compatible' is set. *'cursorbind'* *'crb'* *'nocursorbind'* *'nocrb'* 'cursorbind' 'crb' boolean (default off) local to window {not in Vi} When this option is set, as the cursor in the current window moves other cursorbound windows (windows that also have this option set) move their cursors to the corresponding line and column. This option is useful for viewing the differences between two versions of a file (see 'diff'); in diff mode, inserted and deleted lines (though not characters within a line) are taken into account. *'cursorcolumn'* *'cuc'* *'nocursorcolumn'* *'nocuc'* 'cursorcolumn' 'cuc' boolean (default off) local to window {not in Vi} {not available when compiled without the |+syntax| feature} Highlight the screen column of the cursor with CursorColumn |hl-CursorColumn|. Useful to align text. Will make screen redrawing slower. If you only want the highlighting in the current window you can use these autocommands: > au WinLeave * set nocursorline nocursorcolumn au WinEnter * set cursorline cursorcolumn < *'cursorline'* *'cul'* *'nocursorline'* *'nocul'* 'cursorline' 'cul' boolean (default off) local to window {not in Vi} {not available when compiled without the |+syntax| feature} Highlight the screen line of the cursor with CursorLine |hl-CursorLine|. Useful to easily spot the cursor. Will make screen redrawing slower. When Visual mode is active the highlighting isn't used to make it easier to see the selected text. *'debug'* 'debug' string (default "") global {not in Vi} These values can be used: msg Error messages that would otherwise be omitted will be given anyway. throw Error messages that would otherwise be omitted will be given anyway and also throw an exception and set |v:errmsg|. beep A message will be given when otherwise only a beep would be produced. The values can be combined, separated by a comma. "msg" and "throw" are useful for debugging 'foldexpr', 'formatexpr' or 'indentexpr'. *'define'* *'def'* 'define' 'def' string (default "^\s*#\s*define") global or local to buffer |global-local| {not in Vi} Pattern to be used to find a macro definition. It is a search pattern, just like for the "/" command. This option is used for the commands like "[i" and "[d" |include-search|. The 'isident' option is used to recognize the defined name after the match: {match with 'define'}{non-ID chars}{defined name}{non-ID char} See |option-backslash| about inserting backslashes to include a space or backslash. The default value is for C programs. For C++ this value would be useful, to include const type declarations: > ^\(#\s*define\|[a-z]*\s*const\s*[a-z]*\) < When using the ":set" command, you need to double the backslashes! *'delcombine'* *'deco'* *'nodelcombine'* *'nodeco'* 'delcombine' 'deco' boolean (default off) global {not in Vi} {only available when compiled with the |+multi_byte| feature} If editing Unicode and this option is set, backspace and Normal mode "x" delete each combining character on its own. When it is off (the default) the character along with its combining characters are deleted. Note: When 'delcombine' is set "xx" may work different from "2x"! This is useful for Arabic, Hebrew and many other languages where one may have combining characters overtop of base characters, and want to remove only the combining ones. NOTE: This option is reset when 'compatible' is set. *'dictionary'* *'dict'* 'dictionary' 'dict' string (default "") global or local to buffer |global-local| {not in Vi} List of file names, separated by commas, that are used to lookup words for keyword completion commands |i_CTRL-X_CTRL-K|. Each file should contain a list of words. This can be one word per line, or several words per line, separated by non-keyword characters (white space is preferred). Maximum line length is 510 bytes. When this option is empty, or an entry "spell" is present, spell checking is enabled the currently active spelling is used. |spell| To include a comma in a file name precede it with a backslash. Spaces after a comma are ignored, otherwise spaces are included in the file name. See |option-backslash| about using backslashes. This has nothing to do with the |Dictionary| variable type. Where to find a list of words? - On FreeBSD, there is the file "/usr/share/dict/words". - In the Simtel archive, look in the "msdos/linguist" directory. - In "miscfiles" of the GNU collection. The use of |:set+=| and |:set-=| is preferred when adding or removing directories from the list. This avoids problems when a future version uses another default. Backticks cannot be used in this option for security reasons. *'diff'* *'nodiff'* 'diff' boolean (default off) local to window {not in Vi} {not available when compiled without the |+diff| feature} Join the current window in the group of windows that shows differences between files. See |vimdiff|. *'dex'* *'diffexpr'* 'diffexpr' 'dex' string (default "") global {not in Vi} {not available when compiled without the |+diff| feature} Expression which is evaluated to obtain an ed-style diff file from two versions of a file. See |diff-diffexpr|. This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for security reasons. *'dip'* *'diffopt'* 'diffopt' 'dip' string (default "filler") global {not in Vi} {not available when compiled without the |+diff| feature} Option settings for diff mode. It can consist of the following items. All are optional. Items must be separated by a comma. filler Show filler lines, to keep the text synchronized with a window that has inserted lines at the same position. Mostly useful when windows are side-by-side and 'scrollbind' is set. context:{n} Use a context of {n} lines between a change and a fold that contains unchanged lines. When omitted a context of six lines is used. See |fold-diff|. icase Ignore changes in case of text. "a" and "A" are considered the same. Adds the "-i" flag to the "diff" command if 'diffexpr' is empty. iwhite Ignore changes in amount of white space. Adds the "-b" flag to the "diff" command if 'diffexpr' is empty. Check the documentation of the "diff" command for what this does exactly. It should ignore adding trailing white space, but not leading white space. horizontal Start diff mode with horizontal splits (unless explicitly specified otherwise). vertical Start diff mode with vertical splits (unless explicitly specified otherwise). hiddenoff Do not use diff mode for a buffer when it becomes hidden. foldcolumn:{n} Set the 'foldcolumn' option to {n} when starting diff mode. Without this 2 is used. Examples: > :set diffopt=filler,context:4 :set diffopt= :set diffopt=filler,foldcolumn:3 < *'digraph'* *'dg'* *'nodigraph'* *'nodg'* 'digraph' 'dg' boolean (default off) global {not in Vi} {not available when compiled without the |+digraphs| feature} Enable the entering of digraphs in Insert mode with {char1} <BS> {char2}. See |digraphs|. NOTE: This option is reset when 'compatible' is set. *'directory'* *'dir'* 'directory' 'dir' string (default for Amiga: ".,t:", for MS-DOS and Win32: ".,$TEMP,c:\tmp,c:\temp" for Unix: ".,~/tmp,/var/tmp,/tmp") global List of directory names for the swap file, separated with commas. - The swap file will be created in the first directory where this is possible. - Empty means that no swap file will be used (recovery is impossible!). - A directory "." means to put the swap file in the same directory as the edited file. On Unix, a dot is prepended to the file name, so it doesn't show in a directory listing. On MS-Windows the "hidden" attribute is set and a dot prepended if possible. - A directory starting with "./" (or ".\" for MS-DOS et al.) means to put the swap file relative to where the edited file is. The leading "." is replaced with the path name of the edited file. - For Unix and Win32, if a directory ends in two path separators "//" or "\\", the swap file name will be built from the complete path to the file with all path separators substituted to percent '%' signs. This will ensure file name uniqueness in the preserve directory. On Win32, when a separating comma is following, you must use "//", since "\\" will include the comma in the file name. - Spaces after the comma are ignored, other spaces are considered part of the directory name. To have a space at the start of a directory name, precede it with a backslash. - To include a comma in a directory name precede it with a backslash. - A directory name may end in an ':' or '/'. - Environment variables are expanded |:set_env|. - Careful with '\' characters, type one before a space, type two to get one in the option (see |option-backslash|), for example: > :set dir=c:\\tmp,\ dir\\,with\\,commas,\\\ dir\ with\ spaces < - For backwards compatibility with Vim version 3.0 a '>' at the start of the option is removed. Using "." first in the list is recommended. This means that editing the same file twice will result in a warning. Using "/tmp" on Unix is discouraged: When the system crashes you lose the swap file. "/var/tmp" is often not cleared when rebooting, thus is a better choice than "/tmp". But it can contain a lot of files, your swap files get lost in the crowd. That is why a "tmp" directory in your home directory is tried first. The use of |:set+=| and |:set-=| is preferred when adding or removing directories from the list. This avoids problems when a future version uses another default. This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for security reasons. {Vi: directory to put temp file in, defaults to "/tmp"} *'display'* *'dy'* 'display' 'dy' string (default "", set to "truncate" in |defaults.vim|) global {not in Vi} Change the way text is displayed. This is comma separated list of flags: lastline When included, as much as possible of the last line in a window will be displayed. "@@@" is put in the last columns of the last screen line to indicate the rest of the line is not displayed. truncate Like "lastline", but "@@@" is displayed in the first column of the last screen line. Overrules "lastline". uhex Show unprintable characters hexadecimal as <xx> instead of using ^C and ~C. When neither "lastline" nor "truncate" is included, a last line that doesn't fit is replaced with "@" lines. *'eadirection'* *'ead'* 'eadirection' 'ead' string (default "both") global {not in Vi} {not available when compiled without the |+vertsplit| feature} Tells when the 'equalalways' option applies: ver vertically, width of windows is not affected hor horizontally, height of windows is not affected both width and height of windows is affected *'ed'* *'edcompatible'* *'noed'* *'noedcompatible'* 'edcompatible' 'ed' boolean (default off) global Makes the 'g' and 'c' flags of the ":substitute" command to be toggled each time the flag is given. See |complex-change|. See also 'gdefault' option. Switching this option on may break plugins! *'emoji'* *'emo'* *'noemoji'* *'noemo'* 'emoji' 'emo' boolean (default: on) global {not in Vi} {only available when compiled with the |+multi_byte| feature} When on all Unicode emoji characters are considered to be full width. *'encoding'* *'enc'* *E543* 'encoding' 'enc' string (default: "latin1" or value from $LANG) global {only available when compiled with the |+multi_byte| feature} {not in Vi} Sets the character encoding used inside Vim. It applies to text in the buffers, registers, Strings in expressions, text stored in the viminfo file, etc. It sets the kind of characters which Vim can work with. See |encoding-names| for the possible values. NOTE: Changing this option will not change the encoding of the existing text in Vim. It may cause non-ASCII text to become invalid. It should normally be kept at its default value, or set when Vim starts up. See |multibyte|. To reload the menus see |:menutrans|. This option cannot be set from a |modeline|. It would most likely corrupt the text. NOTE: For GTK+ 2 or later, it is highly recommended to set 'encoding' to "utf-8". Although care has been taken to allow different values of 'encoding', "utf-8" is the natural choice for the environment and avoids unnecessary conversion overhead. "utf-8" has not been made the default to prevent different behavior of the GUI and terminal versions, and to avoid changing the encoding of newly created files without your knowledge (in case 'fileencodings' is empty). The character encoding of files can be different from 'encoding'. This is specified with 'fileencoding'. The conversion is done with iconv() or as specified with 'charconvert'. If you need to know whether 'encoding' is a multi-byte encoding, you can use: > if has("multi_byte_encoding") < Normally 'encoding' will be equal to your current locale. This will be the default if Vim recognizes your environment settings. If 'encoding' is not set to the current locale, 'termencoding' must be set to convert typed and displayed text. See |encoding-table|. When you set this option, it fires the |EncodingChanged| autocommand event so that you can set up fonts if necessary. When the option is set, the value is converted to lowercase. Thus you can set it with uppercase values too. Underscores are translated to '-' signs. When the encoding is recognized, it is changed to the standard name. For example "Latin-1" becomes "latin1", "ISO_88592" becomes "iso-8859-2" and "utf8" becomes "utf-8". Note: "latin1" is also used when the encoding could not be detected. This only works when editing files in the same encoding! When the actual character set is not latin1, make sure 'fileencoding' and 'fileencodings' are empty. When conversion is needed, switch to using utf-8. When "unicode", "ucs-2" or "ucs-4" is used, Vim internally uses utf-8. You don't notice this while editing, but it does matter for the |viminfo-file|. And Vim expects the terminal to use utf-8 too. Thus setting 'encoding' to one of these values instead of utf-8 only has effect for encoding used for files when 'fileencoding' is empty. When 'encoding' is set to a Unicode encoding, and 'fileencodings' was not set yet, the default for 'fileencodings' is changed. *'endofline'* *'eol'* *'noendofline'* *'noeol'* 'endofline' 'eol' boolean (default on) local to buffer {not in Vi} When writing a file and this option is off and the 'binary' option is on, or 'fixeol' option is off, no <EOL> will be written for the last line in the file. This option is automatically set or reset when starting to edit a new file, depending on whether file has an <EOL> for the last line in the file. Normally you don't have to set or reset this option. When 'binary' is off and 'fixeol' is on the value is not used when writing the file. When 'binary' is on or 'fixeol' is off it is used to remember the presence of a <EOL> for the last line in the file, so that when you write the file the situation from the original file can be kept. But you can change it if you want to. *'equalalways'* *'ea'* *'noequalalways'* *'noea'* 'equalalways' 'ea' boolean (default on) global {not in Vi} When on, all the windows are automatically made the same size after splitting or closing a window. This also happens the moment the option is switched on. When off, splitting a window will reduce the size of the current window and leave the other windows the same. When closing a window the extra lines are given to the window next to it (depending on 'splitbelow' and 'splitright'). When mixing vertically and horizontally split windows, a minimal size is computed and some windows may be larger if there is room. The 'eadirection' option tells in which direction the size is affected. Changing the height and width of a window can be avoided by setting 'winfixheight' and 'winfixwidth', respectively. If a window size is specified when creating a new window sizes are currently not equalized (it's complicated, but may be implemented in the future). *'equalprg'* *'ep'* 'equalprg' 'ep' string (default "") global or local to buffer |global-local| {not in Vi} External program to use for "=" command. When this option is empty the internal formatting functions are used; either 'lisp', 'cindent' or 'indentexpr'. When Vim was compiled without internal formatting, the "indent" program is used. Environment variables are expanded |:set_env|. See |option-backslash| about including spaces and backslashes. This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for security reasons. *'errorbells'* *'eb'* *'noerrorbells'* *'noeb'* 'errorbells' 'eb' boolean (default off) global Ring the bell (beep or screen flash) for error messages. This only makes a difference for error messages, the bell will be used always for a lot of errors without a message (e.g., hitting <Esc> in Normal mode). See 'visualbell' on how to make the bell behave like a beep, screen flash or do nothing. See 'belloff' to finetune when to ring the bell. *'errorfile'* *'ef'* 'errorfile' 'ef' string (Amiga default: "AztecC.Err", others: "errors.err") global {not in Vi} {not available when compiled without the |+quickfix| feature} Name of the errorfile for the QuickFix mode (see |:cf|). When the "-q" command-line argument is used, 'errorfile' is set to the following argument. See |-q|. NOT used for the ":make" command. See 'makeef' for that. Environment variables are expanded |:set_env|. See |option-backslash| about including spaces and backslashes. This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for security reasons. *'errorformat'* *'efm'* 'errorformat' 'efm' string (default is very long) global or local to buffer |global-local| {not in Vi} {not available when compiled without the |+quickfix| feature} Scanf-like description of the format for the lines in the error file (see |errorformat|). *'esckeys'* *'ek'* *'noesckeys'* *'noek'* 'esckeys' 'ek' boolean (Vim default: on, Vi default: off) global {not in Vi} Function keys that start with an <Esc> are recognized in Insert mode. When this option is off, the cursor and function keys cannot be used in Insert mode if they start with an <Esc>. The advantage of this is that the single <Esc> is recognized immediately, instead of after one second. Instead of resetting this option, you might want to try changing the values for 'timeoutlen' and 'ttimeoutlen'. Note that when 'esckeys' is off, you can still map anything, but the cursor keys won't work by default. NOTE: This option is set to the Vi default value when 'compatible' is set and to the Vim default value when 'compatible' is reset. *'eventignore'* *'ei'* 'eventignore' 'ei' string (default "") global {not in Vi} A list of autocommand event names, which are to be ignored. When set to "all" or when "all" is one of the items, all autocommand events are ignored, autocommands will not be executed. Otherwise this is a comma separated list of event names. Example: > :set ei=WinEnter,WinLeave < *'expandtab'* *'et'* *'noexpandtab'* *'noet'* 'expandtab' 'et' boolean (default off) local to buffer {not in Vi} In Insert mode: Use the appropriate number of spaces to insert a <Tab>. Spaces are used in indents with the '>' and '<' commands and when 'autoindent' is on. To insert a real tab when 'expandtab' is on, use CTRL-V<Tab>. See also |:retab| and |ins-expandtab|. This option is reset when the 'paste' option is set and restored when the 'paste' option is reset. NOTE: This option is reset when 'compatible' is set. *'exrc'* *'ex'* *'noexrc'* *'noex'* 'exrc' 'ex' boolean (default off) global {not in Vi} Enables the reading of .vimrc, .exrc and .gvimrc in the current directory. Setting this option is a potential security leak. E.g., consider unpacking a package or fetching files from github, a .vimrc in there might be a trojan horse. BETTER NOT SET THIS OPTION! Instead, define an autocommand in your .vimrc to set options for a matching directory. If you do switch this option on you should also consider setting the 'secure' option (see |initialization|). Also see |.vimrc| and |gui-init|. This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for security reasons. *'fileencoding'* *'fenc'* *E213* 'fileencoding' 'fenc' string (default: "") local to buffer {only available when compiled with the |+multi_byte| feature} {not in Vi} Sets the character encoding for the file of this buffer. When 'fileencoding' is different from 'encoding', conversion will be done when writing the file. For reading see below. When 'fileencoding' is empty, the same value as 'encoding' will be used (no conversion when reading or writing a file). No error will be given when the value is set, only when it is used, only when writing a file. Conversion will also be done when 'encoding' and 'fileencoding' are both a Unicode encoding and 'fileencoding' is not utf-8. That's because internally Unicode is always stored as utf-8. WARNING: Conversion can cause loss of information! When 'encoding' is "utf-8" or another Unicode encoding, conversion is most likely done in a way that the reverse conversion results in the same text. When 'encoding' is not "utf-8" some characters may be lost! See 'encoding' for the possible values. Additionally, values may be specified that can be handled by the converter, see |mbyte-conversion|. When reading a file 'fileencoding' will be set from 'fileencodings'. To read a file in a certain encoding it won't work by setting 'fileencoding', use the |++enc| argument. One exception: when 'fileencodings' is empty the value of 'fileencoding' is used. For a new file the global value of 'fileencoding' is used. Prepending "8bit-" and "2byte-" has no meaning here, they are ignored. When the option is set, the value is converted to lowercase. Thus you can set it with uppercase values too. '_' characters are replaced with '-'. If a name is recognized from the list for 'encoding', it is replaced by the standard name. For example "ISO8859-2" becomes "iso-8859-2". When this option is set, after starting to edit a file, the 'modified' option is set, because the file would be different when written. Keep in mind that changing 'fenc' from a modeline happens AFTER the text has been read, thus it applies to when the file will be written. If you do set 'fenc' in a modeline, you might want to set 'nomodified' to avoid not being able to ":q". This option can not be changed when 'modifiable' is off. *'fe'* NOTE: Before version 6.0 this option specified the encoding for the whole of Vim, this was a mistake. Now use 'encoding' instead. The old short name was 'fe', which is no longer used. *'fileencodings'* *'fencs'* 'fileencodings' 'fencs' string (default: "ucs-bom", "ucs-bom,utf-8,default,latin1" when 'encoding' is set to a Unicode value) global {only available when compiled with the |+multi_byte| feature} {not in Vi} This is a list of character encodings considered when starting to edit an existing file. When a file is read, Vim tries to use the first mentioned character encoding. If an error is detected, the next one in the list is tried. When an encoding is found that works, 'fileencoding' is set to it. If all fail, 'fileencoding' is set to an empty string, which means the value of 'encoding' is used. WARNING: Conversion can cause loss of information! When 'encoding' is "utf-8" (or one of the other Unicode variants) conversion is most likely done in a way that the reverse conversion results in the same text. When 'encoding' is not "utf-8" some non-ASCII characters may be lost! You can use the |++bad| argument to specify what is done with characters that can't be converted. For an empty file or a file with only ASCII characters most encodings will work and the first entry of 'fileencodings' will be used (except "ucs-bom", which requires the BOM to be present). If you prefer another encoding use an BufReadPost autocommand event to test if your preferred encoding is to be used. Example: > au BufReadPost * if search('\S', 'w') == 0 | \ set fenc=iso-2022-jp | endif < This sets 'fileencoding' to "iso-2022-jp" if the file does not contain non-blank characters. When the |++enc| argument is used then the value of 'fileencodings' is not used. Note that 'fileencodings' is not used for a new file, the global value of 'fileencoding' is used instead. You can set it with: > :setglobal fenc=iso-8859-2 < This means that a non-existing file may get a different encoding than an empty file. The special value "ucs-bom" can be used to check for a Unicode BOM (Byte Order Mark) at the start of the file. It must not be preceded by "utf-8" or another Unicode encoding for this to work properly. An entry for an 8-bit encoding (e.g., "latin1") should be the last, because Vim cannot detect an error, thus the encoding is always accepted. The special value "default" can be used for the encoding from the environment. This is the default value for 'encoding'. It is useful when 'encoding' is set to "utf-8" and your environment uses a non-latin1 encoding, such as Russian. When 'encoding' is "utf-8" and a file contains an illegal byte sequence it won't be recognized as UTF-8. You can use the |8g8| command to find the illegal byte sequence. WRONG VALUES: WHAT'S WRONG: latin1,utf-8 "latin1" will always be used utf-8,ucs-bom,latin1 BOM won't be recognized in an utf-8 file cp1250,latin1 "cp1250" will always be used If 'fileencodings' is empty, 'fileencoding' is not modified. See 'fileencoding' for the possible values. Setting this option does not have an effect until the next time a file is read. *'fileformat'* *'ff'* 'fileformat' 'ff' string (MS-DOS, MS-Windows, OS/2 default: "dos", Unix default: "unix", Macintosh default: "mac") local to buffer {not in Vi} This gives the <EOL> of the current buffer, which is used for reading/writing the buffer from/to a file: dos <CR> <NL> unix <NL> mac <CR> When "dos" is used, CTRL-Z at the end of a file is ignored. See |file-formats| and |file-read|. For the character encoding of the file see 'fileencoding'. When 'binary' is set, the value of 'fileformat' is ignored, file I/O works like it was set to "unix". This option is set automatically when starting to edit a file and 'fileformats' is not empty and 'binary' is off. When this option is set, after starting to edit a file, the 'modified' option is set, because the file would be different when written. This option can not be changed when 'modifiable' is off. For backwards compatibility: When this option is set to "dos", 'textmode' is set, otherwise 'textmode' is reset. *'fileformats'* *'ffs'* 'fileformats' 'ffs' string (default: Vim+Vi MS-DOS, MS-Windows OS/2: "dos,unix", Vim Unix: "unix,dos", Vim Mac: "mac,unix,dos", Vi Cygwin: "unix,dos", Vi others: "") global {not in Vi} This gives the end-of-line (<EOL>) formats that will be tried when starting to edit a new buffer and when reading a file into an existing buffer: - When empty, the format defined with 'fileformat' will be used always. It is not set automatically. - When set to one name, that format will be used whenever a new buffer is opened. 'fileformat' is set accordingly for that buffer. The 'fileformats' name will be used when a file is read into an existing buffer, no matter what 'fileformat' for that buffer is set to. - When more than one name is present, separated by commas, automatic <EOL> detection will be done when reading a file. When starting to edit a file, a check is done for the <EOL>: 1. If all lines end in <CR><NL>, and 'fileformats' includes "dos", 'fileformat' is set to "dos". 2. If a <NL> is found and 'fileformats' includes "unix", 'fileformat' is set to "unix". Note that when a <NL> is found without a preceding <CR>, "unix" is preferred over "dos". 3. If 'fileformat' has not yet been set, and if a <CR> is found, and if 'fileformats' includes "mac", 'fileformat' is set to "mac". This means that "mac" is only chosen when: "unix" is not present or no <NL> is found in the file, and "dos" is not present or no <CR><NL> is found in the file. Except: if "unix" was chosen, but there is a <CR> before the first <NL>, and there appear to be more <CR>s than <NL>s in the first few lines, "mac" is used. 4. If 'fileformat' is still not set, the first name from 'fileformats' is used. When reading a file into an existing buffer, the same is done, but this happens like 'fileformat' has been set appropriately for that file only, the option is not changed. When 'binary' is set, the value of 'fileformats' is not used. When Vim starts up with an empty buffer the first item is used. You can overrule this by setting 'fileformat' in your .vimrc. For systems with a Dos-like <EOL> (<CR><NL>), when reading files that are ":source"ed and for vimrc files, automatic <EOL> detection may be done: - When 'fileformats' is empty, there is no automatic detection. Dos format will be used. - When 'fileformats' is set to one or more names, automatic detection is done. This is based on the first <NL> in the file: If there is a <CR> in front of it, Dos format is used, otherwise Unix format is used. Also see |file-formats|. For backwards compatibility: When this option is set to an empty string or one format (no comma is included), 'textauto' is reset, otherwise 'textauto' is set. NOTE: This option is set to the Vi default value when 'compatible' is set and to the Vim default value when 'compatible' is reset. *'fileignorecase'* *'fic'* *'nofileignorecase'* *'nofic'* 'fileignorecase' 'fic' boolean (default on for systems where case in file names is normally ignored) global {not in Vi} When set case is ignored when using file names and directories. See 'wildignorecase' for only ignoring case when doing completion. *'filetype'* *'ft'* 'filetype' 'ft' string (default: "") local to buffer {not in Vi} When this option is set, the FileType autocommand event is triggered. All autocommands that match with the value of this option will be executed. Thus the value of 'filetype' is used in place of the file name. Otherwise this option does not always reflect the current file type. This option is normally set when the file type is detected. To enable this use the ":filetype on" command. |:filetype| Setting this option to a different value is most useful in a modeline, for a file for which the file type is not automatically recognized. Example, for in an IDL file: /* vim: set filetype=idl : */ ~ |FileType| |filetypes| When a dot appears in the value then this separates two filetype names. Example: /* vim: set filetype=c.doxygen : */ ~ This will use the "c" filetype first, then the "doxygen" filetype. This works both for filetype plugins and for syntax files. More than one dot may appear. This option is not copied to another buffer, independent of the 's' or 'S' flag in 'cpoptions'. Only normal file name characters can be used, "/\*?[|<>" are illegal. *'fillchars'* *'fcs'* 'fillchars' 'fcs' string (default "vert:|,fold:-") global {not in Vi} {not available when compiled without the |+windows| and |+folding| features} Characters to fill the statuslines and vertical separators. It is a comma separated list of items: item default Used for ~ stl:c ' ' or '^' statusline of the current window stlnc:c ' ' or '=' statusline of the non-current windows vert:c '|' vertical separators |:vsplit| fold:c '-' filling 'foldtext' diff:c '-' deleted lines of the 'diff' option Any one that is omitted will fall back to the default. For "stl" and "stlnc" the space will be used when there is highlighting, '^' or '=' otherwise. Example: > :set fillchars=stl:^,stlnc:=,vert:\|,fold:-,diff:- < This is similar to the default, except that these characters will also be used when there is highlighting. for "stl" and "stlnc" only single-byte values are supported. The highlighting used for these items: item highlight group ~ stl:c StatusLine |hl-StatusLine| stlnc:c StatusLineNC |hl-StatusLineNC| vert:c VertSplit |hl-VertSplit| fold:c Folded |hl-Folded| diff:c DiffDelete |hl-DiffDelete| *'fixendofline'* *'fixeol'* *'nofixendofline'* *'nofixeol'* 'fixendofline' 'fixeol' boolean (default on) local to buffer {not in Vi} When writing a file and this option is on, <EOL> at the end of file will be restored if missing. Turn this option off if you want to preserve the situation from the original file. When the 'binary' option is set the value of this option doesn't matter. See the 'endofline' option. *'fkmap'* *'fk'* *'nofkmap'* *'nofk'* 'fkmap' 'fk' boolean (default off) *E198* global {not in Vi} {only available when compiled with the |+rightleft| feature} When on, the keyboard is mapped for the Farsi character set. Normally you would set 'allowrevins' and use CTRL-_ in insert mode to toggle this option |i_CTRL-_|. See |farsi.txt|. *'foldclose'* *'fcl'* 'foldclose' 'fcl' string (default "") global {not in Vi} {not available when compiled without the |+folding| feature} When set to "all", a fold is closed when the cursor isn't in it and its level is higher than 'foldlevel'. Useful if you want folds to automatically close when moving out of them. *'foldcolumn'* *'fdc'* 'foldcolumn' 'fdc' number (default 0) local to window {not in Vi} {not available when compiled without the |+folding| feature} When non-zero, a column with the specified width is shown at the side of the window which indicates open and closed folds. The maximum value is 12. See |folding|. *'foldenable'* *'fen'* *'nofoldenable'* *'nofen'* 'foldenable' 'fen' boolean (default on) local to window {not in Vi} {not available when compiled without the |+folding| feature} When off, all folds are open. This option can be used to quickly switch between showing all text unfolded and viewing the text with folds (including manually opened or closed folds). It can be toggled with the |zi| command. The 'foldcolumn' will remain blank when 'foldenable' is off. This option is set by commands that create a new fold or close a fold. See |folding|. *'foldexpr'* *'fde'* 'foldexpr' 'fde' string (default: "0") local to window {not in Vi} {not available when compiled without the |+folding| or |+eval| features} The expression used for when 'foldmethod' is "expr". It is evaluated for each line to obtain its fold level. See |fold-expr|. The expression will be evaluated in the |sandbox| if set from a modeline, see |sandbox-option|. This option can't be set from a |modeline| when the 'diff' option is on or the 'modelineexpr' option is off. It is not allowed to change text or jump to another window while evaluating 'foldexpr' |textlock|. *'foldignore'* *'fdi'* 'foldignore' 'fdi' string (default: "#") local to window {not in Vi} {not available when compiled without the |+folding| feature} Used only when 'foldmethod' is "indent". Lines starting with characters in 'foldignore' will get their fold level from surrounding lines. White space is skipped before checking for this character. The default "#" works well for C programs. See |fold-indent|. *'foldlevel'* *'fdl'* 'foldlevel' 'fdl' number (default: 0) local to window {not in Vi} {not available when compiled without the |+folding| feature} Sets the fold level: Folds with a higher level will be closed. Setting this option to zero will close all folds. Higher numbers will close fewer folds. This option is set by commands like |zm|, |zM| and |zR|. See |fold-foldlevel|. *'foldlevelstart'* *'fdls'* 'foldlevelstart' 'fdls' number (default: -1) global {not in Vi} {not available when compiled without the |+folding| feature} Sets 'foldlevel' when starting to edit another buffer in a window. Useful to always start editing with all folds closed (value zero), some folds closed (one) or no folds closed (99). This is done before reading any modeline, thus a setting in a modeline overrules this option. Starting to edit a file for |diff-mode| also ignores this option and closes all folds. It is also done before BufReadPre autocommands, to allow an autocmd to overrule the 'foldlevel' value for specific files. When the value is negative, it is not used. *'foldmarker'* *'fmr'* *E536* 'foldmarker' 'fmr' string (default: "{{{,}}}") local to window {not in Vi} {not available when compiled without the |+folding| feature} The start and end marker used when 'foldmethod' is "marker". There must be one comma, which separates the start and end marker. The marker is a literal string (a regular expression would be too slow). See |fold-marker|. *'foldmethod'* *'fdm'* 'foldmethod' 'fdm' string (default: "manual") local to window {not in Vi} {not available when compiled without the |+folding| feature} The kind of folding used for the current window. Possible values: |fold-manual| manual Folds are created manually. |fold-indent| indent Lines with equal indent form a fold. |fold-expr| expr 'foldexpr' gives the fold level of a line. |fold-marker| marker Markers are used to specify folds. |fold-syntax| syntax Syntax highlighting items specify folds. |fold-diff| diff Fold text that is not changed. *'foldminlines'* *'fml'* 'foldminlines' 'fml' number (default: 1) local to window {not in Vi} {not available when compiled without the |+folding| feature} Sets the number of screen lines above which a fold can be displayed closed. Also for manually closed folds. With the default value of one a fold can only be closed if it takes up two or more screen lines. Set to zero to be able to close folds of just one screen line. Note that this only has an effect on what is displayed. After using "zc" to close a fold, which is displayed open because it's smaller than 'foldminlines', a following "zc" may close a containing fold. *'foldnestmax'* *'fdn'* 'foldnestmax' 'fdn' number (default: 20) local to window {not in Vi} {not available when compiled without the |+folding| feature} Sets the maximum nesting of folds for the "indent" and "syntax" methods. This avoids that too many folds will be created. Using more than 20 doesn't work, because the internal limit is 20. *'foldopen'* *'fdo'* 'foldopen' 'fdo' string (default: "block,hor,mark,percent,quickfix, search,tag,undo") global {not in Vi} {not available when compiled without the |+folding| feature} Specifies for which type of commands folds will be opened, if the command moves the cursor into a closed fold. It is a comma separated list of items. NOTE: When the command is part of a mapping this option is not used. Add the |zv| command to the mapping to get the same effect. (rationale: the mapping may want to control opening folds itself) item commands ~ all any block "(", "{", "[[", "[{", etc. hor horizontal movements: "l", "w", "fx", etc. insert any command in Insert mode jump far jumps: "G", "gg", etc. mark jumping to a mark: "'m", CTRL-O, etc. percent "%" quickfix ":cn", ":crew", ":make", etc. search search for a pattern: "/", "n", "*", "gd", etc. (not for a search pattern in a ":" command) Also for |[s| and |]s|. tag jumping to a tag: ":ta", CTRL-T, etc. undo undo or redo: "u" and CTRL-R When a movement command is used for an operator (e.g., "dl" or "y%") this option is not used. This means the operator will include the whole closed fold. Note that vertical movements are not here, because it would make it very difficult to move onto a closed fold. In insert mode the folds containing the cursor will always be open when text is inserted. To close folds you can re-apply 'foldlevel' with the |zx| command or set the 'foldclose' option to "all". *'foldtext'* *'fdt'* 'foldtext' 'fdt' string (default: "foldtext()") local to window {not in Vi} {not available when compiled without the |+folding| feature} An expression which is used to specify the text displayed for a closed fold. See |fold-foldtext|. The expression will be evaluated in the |sandbox| if set from a modeline, see |sandbox-option|. This option cannot be set in a modeline when 'modelineexpr' is off. It is not allowed to change text or jump to another window while evaluating 'foldtext' |textlock|. *'formatexpr'* *'fex'* 'formatexpr' 'fex' string (default "") local to buffer {not in Vi} {not available when compiled without the |+eval| feature} Expression which is evaluated to format a range of lines for the |gq| operator or automatic formatting (see 'formatoptions'). When this option is empty 'formatprg' is used. The |v:lnum| variable holds the first line to be formatted. The |v:count| variable holds the number of lines to be formatted. The |v:char| variable holds the character that is going to be inserted if the expression is being evaluated due to automatic formatting. This can be empty. Don't insert it yet! Example: > :set formatexpr=mylang#Format() < This will invoke the mylang#Format() function in the autoload/mylang.vim file in 'runtimepath'. |autoload| The expression is also evaluated when 'textwidth' is set and adding text beyond that limit. This happens under the same conditions as when internal formatting is used. Make sure the cursor is kept in the same spot relative to the text then! The |mode()| function will return "i" or "R" in this situation. When the expression evaluates to non-zero Vim will fall back to using the internal format mechanism. The expression will be evaluated in the |sandbox| when set from a modeline, see |sandbox-option|. That stops the option from working, since changing the buffer text is not allowed. This option cannot be set in a modeline when 'modelineexpr' is off. NOTE: This option is set to "" when 'compatible' is set. *'formatoptions'* *'fo'* 'formatoptions' 'fo' string (Vim default: "tcq", Vi default: "vt") local to buffer {not in Vi} This is a sequence of letters which describes how automatic formatting is to be done. See |fo-table|. When the 'paste' option is on, no formatting is done (like 'formatoptions' is empty). Commas can be inserted for readability. To avoid problems with flags that are added in the future, use the "+=" and "-=" feature of ":set" |add-option-flags|. NOTE: This option is set to the Vi default value when 'compatible' is set and to the Vim default value when 'compatible' is reset. *'formatlistpat'* *'flp'* 'formatlistpat' 'flp' string (default: "^\s*\d\+[\]:.)}\t ]\s*") local to buffer {not in Vi} A pattern that is used to recognize a list header. This is used for the "n" flag in 'formatoptions'. The pattern must match exactly the text that will be the indent for the line below it. You can use |/\ze| to mark the end of the match while still checking more characters. There must be a character following the pattern, when it matches the whole line it is handled like there is no match. The default recognizes a number, followed by an optional punctuation character and white space. *'formatprg'* *'fp'* 'formatprg' 'fp' string (default "") global or local to buffer |global-local| {not in Vi} The name of an external program that will be used to format the lines selected with the |gq| operator. The program must take the input on stdin and produce the output on stdout. The Unix program "fmt" is such a program. If the 'formatexpr' option is not empty it will be used instead. Otherwise, if 'formatprg' option is an empty string, the internal format function will be used |C-indenting|. Environment variables are expanded |:set_env|. See |option-backslash| about including spaces and backslashes. This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for security reasons. *'fsync'* *'fs'* *'nofsync'* *'nofs'* 'fsync' 'fs' boolean (default on) global {not in Vi} When on, the library function fsync() will be called after writing a file. This will flush a file to disk, ensuring that it is safely written even on filesystems which do metadata-only journaling. This will force the harddrive to spin up on Linux systems running in laptop mode, so it may be undesirable in some situations. Be warned that turning this off increases the chances of data loss after a crash. On systems without an fsync() implementation, this variable is always off. Also see 'swapsync' for controlling fsync() on swap files. 'fsync' also applies to |writefile()|, unless a flag is used to overrule it. This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for security reasons. *'gdefault'* *'gd'* *'nogdefault'* *'nogd'* 'gdefault' 'gd' boolean (default off) global {not in Vi} When on, the ":substitute" flag 'g' is default on. This means that all matches in a line are substituted instead of one. When a 'g' flag is given to a ":substitute" command, this will toggle the substitution of all or one match. See |complex-change|. command 'gdefault' on 'gdefault' off ~ :s/// subst. all subst. one :s///g subst. one subst. all :s///gg subst. all subst. one NOTE: This option is reset when 'compatible' is set. DEPRECATED: Setting this option may break plugins that are not aware of this option. Also, many users get confused that adding the /g flag has the opposite effect of that it normally does. *'grepformat'* *'gfm'* 'grepformat' 'gfm' string (default "%f:%l:%m,%f:%l%m,%f %l%m") global {not in Vi} Format to recognize for the ":grep" command output. This is a scanf-like string that uses the same format as the 'errorformat' option: see |errorformat|. *'grepprg'* *'gp'* 'grepprg' 'gp' string (default "grep -n ", Unix: "grep -n $* /dev/null", Win32: "findstr /n" or "grep -n", VMS: "SEARCH/NUMBERS ") global or local to buffer |global-local| {not in Vi} Program to use for the |:grep| command. This option may contain '%' and '#' characters, which are expanded like when used in a command- line. The placeholder "$*" is allowed to specify where the arguments will be included. Environment variables are expanded |:set_env|. See |option-backslash| about including spaces and backslashes. When your "grep" accepts the "-H" argument, use this to make ":grep" also work well with a single file: > :set grepprg=grep\ -nH < Special value: When 'grepprg' is set to "internal" the |:grep| command works like |:vimgrep|, |:lgrep| like |:lvimgrep|, |:grepadd| like |:vimgrepadd| and |:lgrepadd| like |:lvimgrepadd|. See also the section |:make_makeprg|, since most of the comments there apply equally to 'grepprg'. For Win32, the default is "findstr /n" if "findstr.exe" can be found, otherwise it's "grep -n". This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for security reasons. *'guicursor'* *'gcr'* *E545* *E546* *E548* *E549* 'guicursor' 'gcr' string (default "n-v-c:block-Cursor/lCursor, ve:ver35-Cursor, o:hor50-Cursor, i-ci:ver25-Cursor/lCursor, r-cr:hor20-Cursor/lCursor, sm:block-Cursor -blinkwait175-blinkoff150-blinkon175", for MS-DOS and Win32 console: "n-v-c:block,o:hor50,i-ci:hor15, r-cr:hor30,sm:block") global {not in Vi} {only available when compiled with GUI enabled, and for MS-DOS and Win32 console} This option tells Vim what the cursor should look like in different modes. It fully works in the GUI. In an MSDOS or Win32 console, only the height of the cursor can be changed. This can be done by specifying a block cursor, or a percentage for a vertical or horizontal cursor. For a console the 't_SI', 't_SR', and 't_EI' escape sequences are used. The option is a comma separated list of parts. Each part consist of a mode-list and an argument-list: mode-list:argument-list,mode-list:argument-list,.. The mode-list is a dash separated list of these modes: n Normal mode v Visual mode ve Visual mode with 'selection' "exclusive" (same as 'v', if not specified) o Operator-pending mode i Insert mode r Replace mode c Command-line Normal (append) mode ci Command-line Insert mode cr Command-line Replace mode sm showmatch in Insert mode a all modes The argument-list is a dash separated list of these arguments: hor{N} horizontal bar, {N} percent of the character height ver{N} vertical bar, {N} percent of the character width block block cursor, fills the whole character [only one of the above three should be present] blinkwait{N} *cursor-blinking* blinkon{N} blinkoff{N} blink times for cursor: blinkwait is the delay before the cursor starts blinking, blinkon is the time that the cursor is shown and blinkoff is the time that the cursor is not shown. The times are in msec. When one of the numbers is zero, there is no blinking. The default is: "blinkwait700-blinkon400-blinkoff250". These numbers are used for a missing entry. This means that blinking is enabled by default. To switch blinking off you can use "blinkon0". The cursor only blinks when Vim is waiting for input, not while executing a command. To make the cursor blink in an xterm, see |xterm-blink|. {group-name} a highlight group name, that sets the color and font for the cursor {group-name}/{group-name} Two highlight group names, the first is used when no language mappings are used, the other when they are. |language-mapping| Examples of parts: n-c-v:block-nCursor in Normal, Command-line and Visual mode, use a block cursor with colors from the "nCursor" highlight group i-ci:ver30-iCursor-blinkwait300-blinkon200-blinkoff150 In Insert and Command-line Insert mode, use a 30% vertical bar cursor with colors from the "iCursor" highlight group. Blink a bit faster. The 'a' mode is different. It will set the given argument-list for all modes. It does not reset anything to defaults. This can be used to do a common setting for all modes. For example, to switch off blinking: "a:blinkon0" Examples of cursor highlighting: > :highlight Cursor gui=reverse guifg=NONE guibg=NONE :highlight Cursor gui=NONE guifg=bg guibg=fg < *'guifont'* *'gfn'* *E235* *E596* 'guifont' 'gfn' string (default "") global {not in Vi} {only available when compiled with GUI enabled} This is a list of fonts which will be used for the GUI version of Vim. In its simplest form the value is just one font name. When the font cannot be found you will get an error message. To try other font names a list can be specified, font names separated with commas. The first valid font is used. On systems where 'guifontset' is supported (X11) and 'guifontset' is not empty, then 'guifont' is not used. Note: As to the GTK GUIs, no error is given against any invalid names, and the first element of the list is always picked up and made use of. This is because, instead of identifying a given name with a font, the GTK GUIs use it to construct a pattern and try to look up a font which best matches the pattern among available fonts, and this way, the matching never fails. An invalid name doesn't matter because a number of font properties other than name will do to get the matching done. Spaces after a comma are ignored. To include a comma in a font name precede it with a backslash. Setting an option requires an extra backslash before a space and a backslash. See also |option-backslash|. For example: > :set guifont=Screen15,\ 7x13,font\\,with\\,commas < will make Vim try to use the font "Screen15" first, and if it fails it will try to use "7x13" and then "font,with,commas" instead. If none of the fonts can be loaded, Vim will keep the current setting. If an empty font list is given, Vim will try using other resource settings (for X, it will use the Vim.font resource), and finally it will try some builtin default which should always be there ("7x13" in the case of X). The font names given should be "normal" fonts. Vim will try to find the related bold and italic fonts. For Win32, GTK, Motif, Mac OS and Photon: > :set guifont=* < will bring up a font requester, where you can pick the font you want. The font name depends on the GUI used. See |setting-guifont| for a way to set 'guifont' for various systems. For the GTK+ 2 and 3 GUIs, the font name looks like this: > :set guifont=Andale\ Mono\ 11 < That's all. XLFDs are not used. For Chinese this is reported to work well: > if has("gui_gtk2") set guifont=Bitstream\ Vera\ Sans\ Mono\ 12,Fixed\ 12 set guifontwide=Microsoft\ Yahei\ 12,WenQuanYi\ Zen\ Hei\ 12 endif < (Replace gui_gtk2 with gui_gtk3 for the GTK+ 3 GUI) For Mac OSX you can use something like this: > :set guifont=Monaco:h10 < Also see 'macatsui', it can help fix display problems. *E236* Note that the fonts must be mono-spaced (all characters have the same width). An exception is GTK: all fonts are accepted, but mono-spaced fonts look best. To preview a font on X11, you might be able to use the "xfontsel" program. The "xlsfonts" program gives a list of all available fonts. For the Win32 GUI *E244* *E245* - takes these options in the font name: hXX - height is XX (points, can be floating-point) wXX - width is XX (points, can be floating-point) b - bold i - italic u - underline s - strikeout cXX - character set XX. Valid charsets are: ANSI, ARABIC, BALTIC, CHINESEBIG5, DEFAULT, EASTEUROPE, GB2312, GREEK, HANGEUL, HEBREW, JOHAB, MAC, OEM, RUSSIAN, SHIFTJIS, SYMBOL, THAI, TURKISH, VIETNAMESE ANSI and BALTIC. Normally you would use "cDEFAULT". qXX - quality XX. Valid quality names are: PROOF, DRAFT, ANTIALIASED, NONANTIALIASED, CLEARTYPE, DEFAULT. Normally you would use "qDEFAULT". Some quality values are not supported in legacy OSs. Use a ':' to separate the options. - A '_' can be used in the place of a space, so you don't need to use backslashes to escape the spaces. - Examples: > :set guifont=courier_new:h12:w5:b:cRUSSIAN :set guifont=Andale_Mono:h7.5:w4.5 < See also |font-sizes|. *'guifontset'* *'gfs'* *E250* *E252* *E234* *E597* *E598* 'guifontset' 'gfs' string (default "") global {not in Vi} {only available when compiled with GUI enabled and with the |+xfontset| feature} {not available in the GTK+ GUI} When not empty, specifies two (or more) fonts to be used. The first one for normal English, the second one for your special language. See |xfontset|. Setting this option also means that all font names will be handled as a fontset name. Also the ones used for the "font" argument of the |:highlight| command. The fonts must match with the current locale. If fonts for the character sets that the current locale uses are not included, setting 'guifontset' will fail. Note the difference between 'guifont' and 'guifontset': In 'guifont' the comma-separated names are alternative names, one of which will be used. In 'guifontset' the whole string is one fontset name, including the commas. It is not possible to specify alternative fontset names. This example works on many X11 systems: > :set guifontset=-*-*-medium-r-normal--16-*-*-*-c-*-*-* < *'guifontwide'* *'gfw'* *E231* *E533* *E534* 'guifontwide' 'gfw' string (default "") global {not in Vi} {only available when compiled with GUI enabled} When not empty, specifies a comma-separated list of fonts to be used for double-width characters. The first font that can be loaded is used. Note: The size of these fonts must be exactly twice as wide as the one specified with 'guifont' and the same height. All GUI versions but GTK+: 'guifontwide' is only used when 'encoding' is set to "utf-8" and 'guifontset' is empty or invalid. When 'guifont' is set and a valid font is found in it and 'guifontwide' is empty Vim will attempt to find a matching double-width font and set 'guifontwide' to it. GTK+ GUI only: *guifontwide_gtk* If set and valid, 'guifontwide' is always used for double width characters, even if 'encoding' is not set to "utf-8". Vim does not attempt to find an appropriate value for 'guifontwide' automatically. If 'guifontwide' is empty Pango/Xft will choose the font for characters not available in 'guifont'. Thus you do not need to set 'guifontwide' at all unless you want to override the choice made by Pango/Xft. Windows +multibyte only: *guifontwide_win_mbyte* If set and valid, 'guifontwide' is used for IME instead of 'guifont'. *'guiheadroom'* *'ghr'* 'guiheadroom' 'ghr' number (default 50) global {not in Vi} {only for GTK and X11 GUI} The number of pixels subtracted from the screen height when fitting the GUI window on the screen. Set this before the GUI is started, e.g., in your |gvimrc| file. When zero, the whole screen height will be used by the window. When positive, the specified number of pixel lines will be left for window decorations and other items on the screen. Set it to a negative value to allow windows taller than the screen. *'guioptions'* *'go'* 'guioptions' 'go' string (default "egmrLtT" (MS-Windows, "t" is removed in |defaults.vim|), "aegimrLtT" (GTK, Motif and Athena), ) global {not in Vi} {only available when compiled with GUI enabled} This option only has an effect in the GUI version of Vim. It is a sequence of letters which describes what components and options of the GUI should be used. To avoid problems with flags that are added in the future, use the "+=" and "-=" feature of ":set" |add-option-flags|. Valid characters are as follows: *'go-!'* '!' External commands are executed in a terminal window. Without this flag the MS-Windows GUI will open a console window to execute the command. The Unix GUI will simulate a dumb terminal to list the command output. The terminal window will be positioned at the bottom, and grow upwards as needed. *guioptions_a* *'go-a'* 'a' Autoselect: If present, then whenever VISUAL mode is started, or the Visual area extended, Vim tries to become the owner of the windowing system's global selection. This means that the Visually highlighted text is available for pasting into other applications as well as into Vim itself. When the Visual mode ends, possibly due to an operation on the text, or when an application wants to paste the selection, the highlighted text is automatically yanked into the "* selection register. Thus the selection is still available for pasting into other applications after the VISUAL mode has ended. If not present, then Vim won't become the owner of the windowing system's global selection unless explicitly told to by a yank or delete operation for the "* register. The same applies to the modeless selection. *'go-P'* 'P' Like autoselect but using the "+ register instead of the "* register. *'go-A'* 'A' Autoselect for the modeless selection. Like 'a', but only applies to the modeless selection. 'guioptions' autoselect Visual autoselect modeless ~ "" - - "a" yes yes "A" - yes "aA" yes yes *'go-c'* 'c' Use console dialogs instead of popup dialogs for simple choices. *'go-e'* 'e' Add tab pages when indicated with 'showtabline'. 'guitablabel' can be used to change the text in the labels. When 'e' is missing a non-GUI tab pages line may be used. The GUI tabs are only supported on some systems, currently GTK, Motif, Mac OS/X and MS-Windows. *'go-f'* 'f' Foreground: Don't use fork() to detach the GUI from the shell where it was started. Use this for programs that wait for the editor to finish (e.g., an e-mail program). Alternatively you can use "gvim -f" or ":gui -f" to start the GUI in the foreground. |gui-fork| Note: Set this option in the vimrc file. The forking may have happened already when the |gvimrc| file is read. *'go-i'* 'i' Use a Vim icon. For GTK with KDE it is used in the left-upper corner of the window. It's black&white on non-GTK, because of limitations of X11. For a color icon, see |X11-icon|. *'go-m'* 'm' Menu bar is present. *'go-M'* 'M' The system menu "$VIMRUNTIME/menu.vim" is not sourced. Note that this flag must be added in the .vimrc file, before switching on syntax or filetype recognition (when the |gvimrc| file is sourced the system menu has already been loaded; the `:syntax on` and `:filetype on` commands load the menu too). *'go-g'* 'g' Grey menu items: Make menu items that are not active grey. If 'g' is not included inactive menu items are not shown at all. Exception: Athena will always use grey menu items. *'go-t'* 't' Include tearoff menu items. Currently only works for Win32, GTK+, and Motif 1.2 GUI. *'go-T'* 'T' Include Toolbar. Currently only in Win32, GTK+, Motif, Photon and Athena GUIs. *'go-r'* 'r' Right-hand scrollbar is always present. *'go-R'* 'R' Right-hand scrollbar is present when there is a vertically split window. *'go-l'* 'l' Left-hand scrollbar is always present. *'go-L'* 'L' Left-hand scrollbar is present when there is a vertically split window. *'go-b'* 'b' Bottom (horizontal) scrollbar is present. Its size depends on the longest visible line, or on the cursor line if the 'h' flag is included. |gui-horiz-scroll| *'go-h'* 'h' Limit horizontal scrollbar size to the length of the cursor line. Reduces computations. |gui-horiz-scroll| And yes, you may even have scrollbars on the left AND the right if you really want to :-). See |gui-scrollbars| for more information. *'go-v'* 'v' Use a vertical button layout for dialogs. When not included, a horizontal layout is preferred, but when it doesn't fit a vertical layout is used anyway. *'go-p'* 'p' Use Pointer callbacks for X11 GUI. This is required for some window managers. If the cursor is not blinking or hollow at the right moment, try adding this flag. This must be done before starting the GUI. Set it in your |gvimrc|. Adding or removing it after the GUI has started has no effect. *'go-F'* 'F' Add a footer. Only for Motif. See |gui-footer|. *'go-k'* 'k' Keep the GUI window size when adding/removing a scrollbar, or toolbar, tabline, etc. Instead, the behavior is similar to when the window is maximized and will adjust 'lines' and 'columns' to fit to the window. Without the 'k' flag Vim will try to keep 'lines' and 'columns' the same when adding and removing GUI components. *'guipty'* *'noguipty'* 'guipty' boolean (default on) global {not in Vi} {only available when compiled with GUI enabled} Only in the GUI: If on, an attempt is made to open a pseudo-tty for I/O to/from shell commands. See |gui-pty|. *'guitablabel'* *'gtl'* 'guitablabel' 'gtl' string (default empty) global {not in Vi} {only available when compiled with GUI enabled and with the |+windows| feature} When nonempty describes the text to use in a label of the GUI tab pages line. When empty and when the result is empty Vim will use a default label. See |setting-guitablabel| for more info. The format of this option is like that of 'statusline'. 'guitabtooltip' is used for the tooltip, see below. The expression will be evaluated in the |sandbox| when set from a modeline, see |sandbox-option|. This option cannot be set in a modeline when 'modelineexpr' is off. Only used when the GUI tab pages line is displayed. 'e' must be present in 'guioptions'. For the non-GUI tab pages line 'tabline' is used. *'guitabtooltip'* *'gtt'* 'guitabtooltip' 'gtt' string (default empty) global {not in Vi} {only available when compiled with GUI enabled and with the |+windows| feature} When nonempty describes the text to use in a tooltip for the GUI tab pages line. When empty Vim will use a default tooltip. This option is otherwise just like 'guitablabel' above. You can include a line break. Simplest method is to use |:let|: > :let &guitabtooltip = "line one\nline two" < This option cannot be set in a modeline when 'modelineexpr' is off. *'helpfile'* *'hf'* 'helpfile' 'hf' string (default (MSDOS) "$VIMRUNTIME\doc\help.txt" (others) "$VIMRUNTIME/doc/help.txt") global {not in Vi} Name of the main help file. All distributed help files should be placed together in one directory. Additionally, all "doc" directories in 'runtimepath' will be used. Environment variables are expanded |:set_env|. For example: "$VIMRUNTIME/doc/help.txt". If $VIMRUNTIME is not set, $VIM is also tried. Also see |$VIMRUNTIME| and |option-backslash| about including spaces and backslashes. This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for security reasons. *'helpheight'* *'hh'* 'helpheight' 'hh' number (default 20) global {not in Vi} {not available when compiled without the |+windows| feature} Minimal initial height of the help window when it is opened with the ":help" command. The initial height of the help window is half of the current window, or (when the 'ea' option is on) the same as other windows. When the height is less than 'helpheight', the height is set to 'helpheight'. Set to zero to disable. *'helplang'* *'hlg'* 'helplang' 'hlg' string (default: messages language or empty) global {only available when compiled with the |+multi_lang| feature} {not in Vi} Comma separated list of languages. Vim will use the first language for which the desired help can be found. The English help will always be used as a last resort. You can add "en" to prefer English over another language, but that will only find tags that exist in that language and not in the English help. Example: > :set helplang=de,it < This will first search German, then Italian and finally English help files. When using |CTRL-]| and ":help!" in a non-English help file Vim will try to find the tag in the current language before using this option. See |help-translated|. *'hidden'* *'hid'* *'nohidden'* *'nohid'* 'hidden' 'hid' boolean (default off) global {not in Vi} When off a buffer is unloaded when it is |abandon|ed. When on a buffer becomes hidden when it is |abandon|ed. If the buffer is still displayed in another window, it does not become hidden, of course. The commands that move through the buffer list sometimes make a buffer hidden although the 'hidden' option is off: When the buffer is modified, 'autowrite' is off or writing is not possible, and the '!' flag was used. See also |windows.txt|. To only make one buffer hidden use the 'bufhidden' option. This option is set for one command with ":hide {command}" |:hide|. WARNING: It's easy to forget that you have changes in hidden buffers. Think twice when using ":q!" or ":qa!". *'highlight'* *'hl'* 'highlight' 'hl' string (default (as a single string): "8:SpecialKey,~:EndOfBuffer,@:NonText, d:Directory,e:ErrorMsg,i:IncSearch, l:Search,m:MoreMsg,M:ModeMsg,n:LineNr, N:CursorLineNr,r:Question,s:StatusLine, S:StatusLineNC,c:VertSplit,t:Title, v:Visual,w:WarningMsg,W:WildMenu,f:Folded, F:FoldColumn,A:DiffAdd,C:DiffChange, D:DiffDelete,T:DiffText,>:SignColumn, B:SpellBad,P:SpellCap,R:SpellRare, L:SpellLocal,-:Conceal,+:Pmenu,=:PmenuSel, x:PmenuSbar,X:PmenuThumb,*:TabLine, #:TabLineSel,_:TabLineFill,!:CursorColumn, .:CursorLine,o:ColorColumn,q:QuickFixLine, z:StatusLineTerm,Z:StatusLineTermNC") global {not in Vi} This option can be used to set highlighting mode for various occasions. It is a comma separated list of character pairs. The first character in a pair gives the occasion, the second the mode to use for that occasion. The occasions are: |hl-SpecialKey| 8 Meta and special keys listed with ":map" |hl-EndOfBuffer| ~ lines after the last line in the buffer |hl-NonText| @ '@' at the end of the window and characters from 'showbreak' |hl-Directory| d directories in CTRL-D listing and other special things in listings |hl-ErrorMsg| e error messages h (obsolete, ignored) |hl-IncSearch| i 'incsearch' highlighting |hl-Search| l last search pattern highlighting (see 'hlsearch') |hl-MoreMsg| m |more-prompt| |hl-ModeMsg| M Mode (e.g., "-- INSERT --") |hl-LineNr| n line number for ":number" and ":#" commands, and when 'number' or 'relativenumber' option is set. |hl-CursorLineNr| N like n for when 'cursorline' or 'relativenumber' is set. |hl-Question| r |hit-enter| prompt and yes/no questions |hl-StatusLine| s status line of current window |status-line| |hl-StatusLineNC| S status lines of not-current windows |hl-Title| t Titles for output from ":set all", ":autocmd" etc. |hl-VertSplit| c column used to separate vertically split windows |hl-Visual| v Visual mode |hl-VisualNOS| V Visual mode when Vim does is "Not Owning the Selection" Only X11 Gui's |gui-x11| and |xterm-clipboard|. |hl-WarningMsg| w warning messages |hl-WildMenu| W wildcard matches displayed for 'wildmenu' |hl-Folded| f line used for closed folds |hl-FoldColumn| F 'foldcolumn' |hl-DiffAdd| A added line in diff mode |hl-DiffChange| C changed line in diff mode |hl-DiffDelete| D deleted line in diff mode |hl-DiffText| T inserted text in diff mode |hl-SignColumn| > column used for |signs| |hl-SpellBad| B misspelled word |spell| |hl-SpellCap| P word that should start with capital |spell| |hl-SpellRare| R rare word |spell| |hl-SpellLocal| L word from other region |spell| |hl-Conceal| - the placeholders used for concealed characters (see 'conceallevel') |hl-Pmenu| + popup menu normal line |hl-PmenuSel| = popup menu normal line |hl-PmenuSbar| x popup menu scrollbar |hl-PmenuThumb| X popup menu scrollbar thumb The display modes are: r reverse (termcap entry "mr" and "me") i italic (termcap entry "ZH" and "ZR") b bold (termcap entry "md" and "me") s standout (termcap entry "so" and "se") u underline (termcap entry "us" and "ue") c undercurl (termcap entry "Cs" and "Ce") t strikethrough (termcap entry "Ts" and "Te") n no highlighting - no highlighting : use a highlight group The default is used for occasions that are not included. If you want to change what the display modes do, see |dos-colors| for an example. When using the ':' display mode, this must be followed by the name of a highlight group. A highlight group can be used to define any type of highlighting, including using color. See |:highlight| on how to define one. The default uses a different group for each occasion. See |highlight-default| for the default highlight groups. *'history'* *'hi'* 'history' 'hi' number (Vim default: 50, Vi default: 0, set to 200 in |defaults.vim|) global {not in Vi} A history of ":" commands, and a history of previous search patterns is remembered. This option decides how many entries may be stored in each of these histories (see |cmdline-editing|). The maximum value is 10000. NOTE: This option is set to the Vi default value when 'compatible' is set and to the Vim default value when 'compatible' is reset. *'hkmap'* *'hk'* *'nohkmap'* *'nohk'* 'hkmap' 'hk' boolean (default off) global {not in Vi} {only available when compiled with the |+rightleft| feature} When on, the keyboard is mapped for the Hebrew character set. Normally you would set 'allowrevins' and use CTRL-_ in insert mode to toggle this option. See |rileft.txt|. NOTE: This option is reset when 'compatible' is set. *'hkmapp'* *'hkp'* *'nohkmapp'* *'nohkp'* 'hkmapp' 'hkp' boolean (default off) global {not in Vi} {only available when compiled with the |+rightleft| feature} When on, phonetic keyboard mapping is used. 'hkmap' must also be on. This is useful if you have a non-Hebrew keyboard. See |rileft.txt|. NOTE: This option is reset when 'compatible' is set. *'hlsearch'* *'hls'* *'nohlsearch'* *'nohls'* 'hlsearch' 'hls' boolean (default off) global {not in Vi} {not available when compiled without the |+extra_search| feature} When there is a previous search pattern, highlight all its matches. The type of highlighting used can be set with the 'l' occasion in the 'highlight' option. This uses the "Search" highlight group by default. Note that only the matching text is highlighted, any offsets are not applied. See also: 'incsearch' and |:match|. When you get bored looking at the highlighted matches, you can turn it off with |:nohlsearch|. This does not change the option value, as soon as you use a search command, the highlighting comes back. 'redrawtime' specifies the maximum time spent on finding matches. When the search pattern can match an end-of-line, Vim will try to highlight all of the matched text. However, this depends on where the search starts. This will be the first line in the window or the first line below a closed fold. A match in a previous line which is not drawn may not continue in a newly drawn line. You can specify whether the highlight status is restored on startup with the 'h' flag in 'viminfo' |viminfo-h|. NOTE: This option is reset when 'compatible' is set. *'icon'* *'noicon'* 'icon' boolean (default off, on when title can be restored) global {not in Vi} {not available when compiled without the |+title| feature} When on, the icon text of the window will be set to the value of 'iconstring' (if it is not empty), or to the name of the file currently being edited. Only the last part of the name is used. Overridden by the 'iconstring' option. Only works if the terminal supports setting window icons (currently only X11 GUI and terminals with a non-empty 't_IS' option - these are Unix xterm and iris-ansi by default, where 't_IS' is taken from the builtin termcap). When Vim was compiled with HAVE_X11 defined, the original icon will be restored if possible |X11|. See |X11-icon| for changing the icon on X11. For MS-Windows the icon can be changed, see |windows-icon|. *'iconstring'* 'iconstring' string (default "") global {not in Vi} {not available when compiled without the |+title| feature} When this option is not empty, it will be used for the icon text of the window. This happens only when the 'icon' option is on. Only works if the terminal supports setting window icon text (currently only X11 GUI and terminals with a non-empty 't_IS' option). Does not work for MS Windows. When Vim was compiled with HAVE_X11 defined, the original icon will be restored if possible |X11|. When this option contains printf-style '%' items, they will be expanded according to the rules used for 'statusline'. See 'titlestring' for example settings. This option cannot be set in a modeline when 'modelineexpr' is off. {not available when compiled without the |+statusline| feature} *'ignorecase'* *'ic'* *'noignorecase'* *'noic'* 'ignorecase' 'ic' boolean (default off) global Ignore case in search patterns. Also used when searching in the tags file. Also see 'smartcase' and 'tagcase'. Can be overruled by using "\c" or "\C" in the pattern, see |/ignorecase|. *'imactivatefunc'* *'imaf'* 'imactivatefunc' 'imaf' string (default "") global {not in Vi} {only available when compiled with |+mbyte|} This option specifies a function that will be called to activate or deactivate the Input Method. It is not used in the GUI. The expression will be evaluated in the |sandbox| when set from a modeline, see |sandbox-option|. Example: > function ImActivateFunc(active) if a:active ... do something else ... do something endif " return value is not used endfunction set imactivatefunc=ImActivateFunc < *'imactivatekey'* *'imak'* 'imactivatekey' 'imak' string (default "") global {not in Vi} {only available when compiled with |+xim| and |+GUI_GTK|} *E599* Specifies the key that your Input Method in X-Windows uses for activation. When this is specified correctly, vim can fully control IM with 'imcmdline', 'iminsert' and 'imsearch'. You can't use this option to change the activation key, the option tells Vim what the key is. Format: [MODIFIER_FLAG-]KEY_STRING These characters can be used for MODIFIER_FLAG (case is ignored): S Shift key L Lock key C Control key 1 Mod1 key 2 Mod2 key 3 Mod3 key 4 Mod4 key 5 Mod5 key Combinations are allowed, for example "S-C-space" or "SC-space" are both shift+ctrl+space. See <X11/keysymdef.h> and XStringToKeysym for KEY_STRING. Example: > :set imactivatekey=S-space < "S-space" means shift+space. This is the activation key for kinput2 + canna (Japanese), and ami (Korean). *'imcmdline'* *'imc'* *'noimcmdline'* *'noimc'* 'imcmdline' 'imc' boolean (default off) global {not in Vi} {only available when compiled with |+mbyte|} When set the Input Method is always on when starting to edit a command line, unless entering a search pattern (see 'imsearch' for that). Setting this option is useful when your input method allows entering English characters directly, e.g., when it's used to type accented characters with dead keys. *'imdisable'* *'imd'* *'noimdisable'* *'noimd'* 'imdisable' 'imd' boolean (default off, on for some systems (SGI)) global {not in Vi} {only available when compiled with |+mbyte|} When set the Input Method is never used. This is useful to disable the IM when it doesn't work properly. Currently this option is on by default for SGI/IRIX machines. This may change in later releases. *'iminsert'* *'imi'* 'iminsert' 'imi' number (default 0) local to buffer {not in Vi} Specifies whether :lmap or an Input Method (IM) is to be used in Insert mode. Valid values: 0 :lmap is off and IM is off 1 :lmap is ON and IM is off 2 :lmap is off and IM is ON To always reset the option to zero when leaving Insert mode with <Esc> this can be used: > :inoremap <ESC> <ESC>:set iminsert=0<CR> < This makes :lmap and IM turn off automatically when leaving Insert mode. Note that this option changes when using CTRL-^ in Insert mode |i_CTRL-^|. The value is set to 1 when setting 'keymap' to a valid keymap name. It is also used for the argument of commands like "r" and "f". The value 0 may not work correctly with Athena and Motif with some XIM methods. Use 'imdisable' to disable XIM then. You can set 'imactivatefunc' and 'imstatusfunc' to handle IME/XIM via external command if vim is not compiled with the |+xim|, |+multi_byte_ime| or |global-ime|. *'imsearch'* *'ims'* 'imsearch' 'ims' number (default -1) local to buffer {not in Vi} Specifies whether :lmap or an Input Method (IM) is to be used when entering a search pattern. Valid values: -1 the value of 'iminsert' is used, makes it look like 'iminsert' is also used when typing a search pattern 0 :lmap is off and IM is off 1 :lmap is ON and IM is off 2 :lmap is off and IM is ON Note that this option changes when using CTRL-^ in Command-line mode |c_CTRL-^|. The value is set to 1 when it is not -1 and setting the 'keymap' option to a valid keymap name. The value 0 may not work correctly with Athena and Motif with some XIM methods. Use 'imdisable' to disable XIM then. *'imstatusfunc'* *'imsf'* 'imstatusfunc' 'imsf' string (default "") global {not in Vi} {only available when compiled with |+mbyte|} This option specifies a function that is called to obtain the status of Input Method. It must return a positive number when IME is active. It is not used in the GUI. Example: > function ImStatusFunc() let is_active = ...do something return is_active ? 1 : 0 endfunction set imstatusfunc=ImStatusFunc < NOTE: This function is invoked very often. Keep it fast. *'imstyle'* *'imst'* 'imstyle' 'imst' number (default 1) global {not in Vi} {only available when compiled with |+xim| and |+GUI_GTK|} This option specifies the input style of Input Method: 0 use on-the-spot style 1 over-the-spot style See: |xim-input-style| For a long time on-the-spot style had been used in the GTK version of vim, however, it is known that it causes troubles when using mappings, |single-repeat|, etc. Therefore over-the-spot style becomes the default now. This should work fine for most people, however if you have any problem with it, try using on-the-spot style. *'include'* *'inc'* 'include' 'inc' string (default "^\s*#\s*include") global or local to buffer |global-local| {not in Vi} {not available when compiled without the |+find_in_path| feature} Pattern to be used to find an include command. It is a search pattern, just like for the "/" command (See |pattern|). The default value is for C programs. This option is used for the commands "[i", "]I", "[d", etc. Normally the 'isfname' option is used to recognize the file name that comes after the matched pattern. But if "\zs" appears in the pattern then the text matched from "\zs" to the end, or until "\ze" if it appears, is used as the file name. Use this to include characters that are not in 'isfname', such as a space. You can then use 'includeexpr' to process the matched text. See |option-backslash| about including spaces and backslashes. *'includeexpr'* *'inex'* 'includeexpr' 'inex' string (default "") local to buffer {not in Vi} {not available when compiled without the |+find_in_path| or |+eval| features} Expression to be used to transform the string found with the 'include' option to a file name. Mostly useful to change "." to "/" for Java: > :set includeexpr=substitute(v:fname,'\\.','/','g') < The "v:fname" variable will be set to the file name that was detected. Also used for the |gf| command if an unmodified file name can't be found. Allows doing "gf" on the name after an 'include' statement. Also used for |<cfile>|. The expression will be evaluated in the |sandbox| when set from a modeline, see |sandbox-option|. It is not allowed to change text or jump to another window while evaluating 'includeexpr' |textlock|. *'incsearch'* *'is'* *'noincsearch'* *'nois'* 'incsearch' 'is' boolean (default off, set in |defaults.vim| if the +reltime feature is supported) global {not in Vi} {not available when compiled without the |+extra_search| features} While typing a search command, show where the pattern, as it was typed so far, matches. The matched string is highlighted. If the pattern is invalid or not found, nothing is shown. The screen will be updated often, this is only useful on fast terminals. Note that the match will be shown, but the cursor will return to its original position when no match is found and when pressing <Esc>. You still need to finish the search command with <Enter> to move the cursor to the match. You can use the CTRL-G and CTRL-T keys to move to the next and previous match. |c_CTRL-G| |c_CTRL-T| When compiled with the |+reltime| feature Vim only searches for about half a second. With a complicated pattern and/or a lot of text the match may not be found. This is to avoid that Vim hangs while you are typing the pattern. The highlighting can be set with the 'i' flag in 'highlight'. When 'hlsearch' is on, all matched strings are highlighted too while typing a search command. See also: 'hlsearch'. If you don't want turn 'hlsearch' on, but want to highlight all matches while searching, you can turn on and off 'hlsearch' with autocmd. Example: > augroup vimrc-incsearch-highlight autocmd! autocmd CmdlineEnter /,\? :set hlsearch autocmd CmdlineLeave /,\? :set nohlsearch augroup END < CTRL-L can be used to add one character from after the current match to the command line. If 'ignorecase' and 'smartcase' are set and the command line has no uppercase characters, the added character is converted to lowercase. CTRL-R CTRL-W can be used to add the word at the end of the current match, excluding the characters that were already typed. NOTE: This option is reset when 'compatible' is set. *'indentexpr'* *'inde'* 'indentexpr' 'inde' string (default "") local to buffer {not in Vi} {not available when compiled without the |+cindent| or |+eval| features} Expression which is evaluated to obtain the proper indent for a line. It is used when a new line is created, for the |=| operator and in Insert mode as specified with the 'indentkeys' option. When this option is not empty, it overrules the 'cindent' and 'smartindent' indenting. When 'lisp' is set, this option is overridden by the Lisp indentation algorithm. When 'paste' is set this option is not used for indenting. The expression is evaluated with |v:lnum| set to the line number for which the indent is to be computed. The cursor is also in this line when the expression is evaluated (but it may be moved around). The expression must return the number of spaces worth of indent. It can return "-1" to keep the current indent (this means 'autoindent' is used for the indent). Functions useful for computing the indent are |indent()|, |cindent()| and |lispindent()|. The evaluation of the expression must not have side effects! It must not change the text, jump to another window, etc. Afterwards the cursor position is always restored, thus the cursor may be moved. Normally this option would be set to call a function: > :set indentexpr=GetMyIndent() < Error messages will be suppressed, unless the 'debug' option contains "msg". See |indent-expression|. NOTE: This option is set to "" when 'compatible' is set. The expression will be evaluated in the |sandbox| when set from a modeline, see |sandbox-option|. It is not allowed to change text or jump to another window while evaluating 'indentexpr' |textlock|. *'indentkeys'* *'indk'* 'indentkeys' 'indk' string (default "0{,0},:,0#,!^F,o,O,e") local to buffer {not in Vi} {not available when compiled without the |+cindent| feature} A list of keys that, when typed in Insert mode, cause reindenting of the current line. Only happens if 'indentexpr' isn't empty. The format is identical to 'cinkeys', see |indentkeys-format|. See |C-indenting| and |indent-expression|. *'infercase'* *'inf'* *'noinfercase'* *'noinf'* 'infercase' 'inf' boolean (default off) local to buffer {not in Vi} When doing keyword completion in insert mode |ins-completion|, and 'ignorecase' is also on, the case of the match is adjusted depending on the typed text. If the typed text contains a lowercase letter where the match has an upper case letter, the completed part is made lowercase. If the typed text has no lowercase letters and the match has a lowercase letter where the typed text has an uppercase letter, and there is a letter before it, the completed part is made uppercase. With 'noinfercase' the match is used as-is. *'insertmode'* *'im'* *'noinsertmode'* *'noim'* 'insertmode' 'im' boolean (default off) global {not in Vi} Makes Vim work in a way that Insert mode is the default mode. Useful if you want to use Vim as a modeless editor. Used for |evim|. These Insert mode commands will be useful: - Use the cursor keys to move around. - Use CTRL-O to execute one Normal mode command |i_CTRL-O|. When this is a mapping, it is executed as if 'insertmode' was off. Normal mode remains active until the mapping is finished. - Use CTRL-L to execute a number of Normal mode commands, then use <Esc> to get back to Insert mode. Note that CTRL-L moves the cursor left, like <Esc> does when 'insertmode' isn't set. |i_CTRL-L| These items change when 'insertmode' is set: - when starting to edit of a file, Vim goes to Insert mode. - <Esc> in Insert mode is a no-op and beeps. - <Esc> in Normal mode makes Vim go to Insert mode. - CTRL-L in Insert mode is a command, it is not inserted. - CTRL-Z in Insert mode suspends Vim, see |CTRL-Z|. *i_CTRL-Z* However, when <Esc> is used inside a mapping, it behaves like 'insertmode' was not set. This was done to be able to use the same mappings with 'insertmode' set or not set. When executing commands with |:normal| 'insertmode' is not used. NOTE: This option is reset when 'compatible' is set. *'isfname'* *'isf'* 'isfname' 'isf' string (default for MS-DOS, Win32 and OS/2: "@,48-57,/,\,.,-,_,+,,,#,$,%,{,},[,],:,@-@,!,~,=" for AMIGA: "@,48-57,/,.,-,_,+,,,$,:" for VMS: "@,48-57,/,.,-,_,+,,,#,$,%,<,>,[,],:,;,~" for OS/390: "@,240-249,/,.,-,_,+,,,#,$,%,~,=" otherwise: "@,48-57,/,.,-,_,+,,,#,$,%,~,=") global {not in Vi} The characters specified by this option are included in file names and path names. Filenames are used for commands like "gf", "[i" and in the tags file. It is also used for "\f" in a |pattern|. Multi-byte characters 256 and above are always included, only the characters up to 255 are specified with this option. For UTF-8 the characters 0xa0 to 0xff are included as well. Think twice before adding white space to this option. Although a space may appear inside a file name, the effect will be that Vim doesn't know where a file name starts or ends when doing completion. It most likely works better without a space in 'isfname'. Note that on systems using a backslash as path separator, Vim tries to do its best to make it work as you would expect. That is a bit tricky, since Vi originally used the backslash to escape special characters. Vim will not remove a backslash in front of a normal file name character on these systems, but it will on Unix and alikes. The '&' and '^' are not included by default, because these are special for cmd.exe. The format of this option is a list of parts, separated with commas. Each part can be a single character number or a range. A range is two character numbers with '-' in between. A character number can be a decimal number between 0 and 255 or the ASCII character itself (does not work for digits). Example: "_,-,128-140,#-43" (include '_' and '-' and the range 128 to 140 and '#' to 43) If a part starts with '^', the following character number or range will be excluded from the option. The option is interpreted from left to right. Put the excluded character after the range where it is included. To include '^' itself use it as the last character of the option or the end of a range. Example: "^a-z,#,^" (exclude 'a' to 'z', include '#' and '^') If the character is '@', all characters where isalpha() returns TRUE are included. Normally these are the characters a to z and A to Z, plus accented characters. To include '@' itself use "@-@". Examples: "@,^a-z" All alphabetic characters, excluding lower case ASCII letters. "a-z,A-Z,@-@" All letters plus the '@' character. A comma can be included by using it where a character number is expected. Example: "48-57,,,_" Digits, comma and underscore. A comma can be excluded by prepending a '^'. Example: " -~,^,,9" All characters from space to '~', excluding comma, plus <Tab>. See |option-backslash| about including spaces and backslashes. *'isident'* *'isi'* 'isident' 'isi' string (default for MS-DOS, Win32 and OS/2: "@,48-57,_,128-167,224-235" otherwise: "@,48-57,_,192-255") global {not in Vi} The characters given by this option are included in identifiers. Identifiers are used in recognizing environment variables and after a match of the 'define' option. It is also used for "\i" in a |pattern|. See 'isfname' for a description of the format of this option. Careful: If you change this option, it might break expanding environment variables. E.g., when '/' is included and Vim tries to expand "$HOME/.viminfo". Maybe you should change 'iskeyword' instead. *'iskeyword'* *'isk'* 'iskeyword' 'isk' string (Vim default for MS-DOS and Win32: "@,48-57,_,128-167,224-235" otherwise: "@,48-57,_,192-255" Vi default: "@,48-57,_") local to buffer {not in Vi} Keywords are used in searching and recognizing with many commands: "w", "*", "[i", etc. It is also used for "\k" in a |pattern|. See 'isfname' for a description of the format of this option. For C programs you could use "a-z,A-Z,48-57,_,.,-,>". For a help file it is set to all non-blank printable characters except '*', '"' and '|' (so that CTRL-] on a command finds the help for that command). When the 'lisp' option is on the '-' character is always included. This option also influences syntax highlighting, unless the syntax uses |:syn-iskeyword|. NOTE: This option is set to the Vi default value when 'compatible' is set and to the Vim default value when 'compatible' is reset. *'isprint'* *'isp'* 'isprint' 'isp' string (default for MS-DOS, Win32, OS/2 and Macintosh: "@,~-255"; otherwise: "@,161-255") global {not in Vi} The characters given by this option are displayed directly on the screen. It is also used for "\p" in a |pattern|. The characters from space (ASCII 32) to '~' (ASCII 126) are always displayed directly, even when they are not included in 'isprint' or excluded. See 'isfname' for a description of the format of this option. Non-printable characters are displayed with two characters: 0 - 31 "^@" - "^_" 32 - 126 always single characters 127 "^?" 128 - 159 "~@" - "~_" 160 - 254 "| " - "|~" 255 "~?" When 'encoding' is a Unicode one, illegal bytes from 128 to 255 are displayed as <xx>, with the hexadecimal value of the byte. When 'display' contains "uhex" all unprintable characters are displayed as <xx>. The SpecialKey highlighting will be used for unprintable characters. |hl-SpecialKey| Multi-byte characters 256 and above are always included, only the characters up to 255 are specified with this option. When a character is printable but it is not available in the current font, a replacement character will be shown. Unprintable and zero-width Unicode characters are displayed as <xxxx>. There is no option to specify these characters. *'joinspaces'* *'js'* *'nojoinspaces'* *'nojs'* 'joinspaces' 'js' boolean (default on) global {not in Vi} Insert two spaces after a '.', '?' and '!' with a join command. When 'cpoptions' includes the 'j' flag, only do this after a '.'. Otherwise only one space is inserted. NOTE: This option is set when 'compatible' is set. *'key'* 'key' string (default "") local to buffer {not in Vi} {only available when compiled with the |+cryptv| feature} The key that is used for encrypting and decrypting the current buffer. See |encryption| and 'cryptmethod'. Careful: Do not set the key value by hand, someone might see the typed key. Use the |:X| command. But you can make 'key' empty: > :set key= < It is not possible to get the value of this option with ":set key" or "echo &key". This is to avoid showing it to someone who shouldn't know. It also means you cannot see it yourself once you have set it, be careful not to make a typing error! You can use "&key" in an expression to detect whether encryption is enabled. When 'key' is set it returns "*****" (five stars). *'keymap'* *'kmp'* *E544* 'keymap' 'kmp' string (default "") local to buffer {not in Vi} {only available when compiled with the |+keymap| feature} Name of a keyboard mapping. See |mbyte-keymap|. Setting this option to a valid keymap name has the side effect of setting 'iminsert' to one, so that the keymap becomes effective. 'imsearch' is also set to one, unless it was -1 Only normal file name characters can be used, "/\*?[|<>" are illegal. *'keymodel'* *'km'* 'keymodel' 'km' string (default "") global {not in Vi} List of comma separated words, which enable special things that keys can do. These values can be used: startsel Using a shifted special key starts selection (either Select mode or Visual mode, depending on "key" being present in 'selectmode'). stopsel Using a not-shifted special key stops selection. Special keys in this context are the cursor keys, <End>, <Home>, <PageUp> and <PageDown>. The 'keymodel' option is set by the |:behave| command. *'keywordprg'* *'kp'* 'keywordprg' 'kp' string (default "man" or "man -s", DOS: ":help", VMS: "help") global or local to buffer |global-local| {not in Vi} Program to use for the |K| command. Environment variables are expanded |:set_env|. ":help" may be used to access the Vim internal help. (Note that previously setting the global option to the empty value did this, which is now deprecated.) When the first character is ":", the command is invoked as a Vim Ex command prefixed with [count]. When "man", "man -s" or an Ex command is used, Vim will automatically translate a count for the "K" command and pass it as the first argument. For "man -s" the "-s" is removed when there is no count. See |option-backslash| about including spaces and backslashes. Example: > :set keywordprg=man\ -s < This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for security reasons. *'langmap'* *'lmap'* *E357* *E358* 'langmap' 'lmap' string (default "") global {not in Vi} {only available when compiled with the |+langmap| feature} This option allows switching your keyboard into a special language mode. When you are typing text in Insert mode the characters are inserted directly. When in Normal mode the 'langmap' option takes care of translating these special characters to the original meaning of the key. This means you don't have to change the keyboard mode to be able to execute Normal mode commands. This is the opposite of the 'keymap' option, where characters are mapped in Insert mode. Also consider resetting 'langremap' to avoid 'langmap' applies to characters resulting from a mapping. This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for security reasons. Example (for Greek, in UTF-8): *greek* > :set langmap=ΑA,ΒB,ΨC,ΔD,ΕE,ΦF,ΓG,ΗH,ΙI,ΞJ,ΚK,ΛL,ΜM,ΝN,ΟO,ΠP,QQ,ΡR,ΣS,ΤT,ΘU,ΩV,WW,ΧX,ΥY,ΖZ,αa,βb,ψc,δd,εe,φf,γg,ηh,ιi,ξj,κk,λl,μm,νn,οo,πp,qq,ρr,σs,τt,θu,ωv,ςw,χx,υy,ζz < Example (exchanges meaning of z and y for commands): > :set langmap=zy,yz,ZY,YZ < The 'langmap' option is a list of parts, separated with commas. Each part can be in one of two forms: 1. A list of pairs. Each pair is a "from" character immediately followed by the "to" character. Examples: "aA", "aAbBcC". 2. A list of "from" characters, a semi-colon and a list of "to" characters. Example: "abc;ABC" Example: "aA,fgh;FGH,cCdDeE" Special characters need to be preceded with a backslash. These are ";", ',' and backslash itself. This will allow you to activate vim actions without having to switch back and forth between the languages. Your language characters will be understood as normal vim English characters (according to the langmap mappings) in the following cases: o Normal/Visual mode (commands, buffer/register names, user mappings) o Insert/Replace Mode: Register names after CTRL-R o Insert/Replace Mode: Mappings Characters entered in Command-line mode will NOT be affected by this option. Note that this option can be changed at any time allowing to switch between mappings for different languages/encodings. Use a mapping to avoid having to type it each time! *'langmenu'* *'lm'* 'langmenu' 'lm' string (default "") global {not in Vi} {only available when compiled with the |+menu| and |+multi_lang| features} Language to use for menu translation. Tells which file is loaded from the "lang" directory in 'runtimepath': > "lang/menu_" . &langmenu . ".vim" < (without the spaces). For example, to always use the Dutch menus, no matter what $LANG is set to: > :set langmenu=nl_NL.ISO_8859-1 < When 'langmenu' is empty, |v:lang| is used. Only normal file name characters can be used, "/\*?[|<>" are illegal. If your $LANG is set to a non-English language but you do want to use the English menus: > :set langmenu=none < This option must be set before loading menus, switching on filetype detection or syntax highlighting. Once the menus are defined setting this option has no effect. But you could do this: > :source $VIMRUNTIME/delmenu.vim :set langmenu=de_DE.ISO_8859-1 :source $VIMRUNTIME/menu.vim < Warning: This deletes all menus that you defined yourself! *'langnoremap'* *'lnr'* *'nolangnoremap'* *'nolnr'* 'langnoremap' 'lnr' boolean (default off, set in |defaults.vim|) global {not in Vi} {only available when compiled with the |+langmap| feature} This is just like 'langremap' but with the value inverted. It only exists for backwards compatibility. When setting 'langremap' then 'langnoremap' is set to the inverted value, and the other way around. *'langremap'* *'lrm'* *'nolangremap'* *'nolrm'* 'langremap' 'lrm' boolean (default on, reset in |defaults.vim|) global {not in Vi} {only available when compiled with the |+langmap| feature} When off, setting 'langmap' does not apply to characters resulting from a mapping. This basically means, if you noticed that setting 'langmap' disables some of your mappings, try resetting this option. This option defaults to on for backwards compatibility. Set it off if that works for you to avoid mappings to break. *'laststatus'* *'ls'* 'laststatus' 'ls' number (default 1) global {not in Vi} The value of this option influences when the last window will have a status line: 0: never 1: only if there are at least two windows 2: always The screen looks nicer with a status line if you have several windows, but it takes another screen line. |status-line| *'lazyredraw'* *'lz'* *'nolazyredraw'* *'nolz'* 'lazyredraw' 'lz' boolean (default off) global {not in Vi} When this option is set, the screen will not be redrawn while executing macros, registers and other commands that have not been typed. Also, updating the window title is postponed. To force an update use |:redraw|. *'linebreak'* *'lbr'* *'nolinebreak'* *'nolbr'* 'linebreak' 'lbr' boolean (default off) local to window {not in Vi} {not available when compiled without the |+linebreak| feature} If on, Vim will wrap long lines at a character in 'breakat' rather than at the last character that fits on the screen. Unlike 'wrapmargin' and 'textwidth', this does not insert <EOL>s in the file, it only affects the way the file is displayed, not its contents. If 'breakindent' is set, line is visually indented. Then, the value of 'showbreak' is used to put in front of wrapped lines. This option is not used when the 'wrap' option is off. Note that <Tab> characters after an <EOL> are mostly not displayed with the right amount of white space. *'lines'* *E593* 'lines' number (default 24 or terminal height) global Number of lines of the Vim window. Normally you don't need to set this. It is done automatically by the terminal initialization code. Also see |posix-screen-size|. When Vim is running in the GUI or in a resizable window, setting this option will cause the window size to be changed. When you only want to use the size for the GUI, put the command in your |gvimrc| file. Vim limits the number of lines to what fits on the screen. You can use this command to get the tallest window possible: > :set lines=999 < Minimum value is 2, maximum value is 1000. If you get fewer lines than expected, check the 'guiheadroom' option. When you set this option and Vim is unable to change the physical number of lines of the display, the display may be messed up. *'linespace'* *'lsp'* 'linespace' 'lsp' number (default 0, 1 for Win32 GUI) global {not in Vi} {only in the GUI} Number of pixel lines inserted between characters. Useful if the font uses the full character cell height, making lines touch each other. When non-zero there is room for underlining. With some fonts there can be too much room between lines (to have space for ascents and descents). Then it makes sense to set 'linespace' to a negative value. This may cause display problems though! *'lisp'* *'nolisp'* 'lisp' boolean (default off) local to buffer {not available when compiled without the |+lispindent| feature} Lisp mode: When <Enter> is typed in insert mode set the indent for the next line to Lisp standards (well, sort of). Also happens with "cc" or "S". 'autoindent' must also be on for this to work. The 'p' flag in 'cpoptions' changes the method of indenting: Vi compatible or better. Also see 'lispwords'. The '-' character is included in keyword characters. Redefines the "=" operator to use this same indentation algorithm rather than calling an external program if 'equalprg' is empty. This option is not used when 'paste' is set. {Vi: Does it a little bit differently} *'lispwords'* *'lw'* 'lispwords' 'lw' string (default is very long) global or local to buffer |global-local| {not in Vi} {not available when compiled without the |+lispindent| feature} Comma separated list of words that influence the Lisp indenting. |'lisp'| *'list'* *'nolist'* 'list' boolean (default off) local to window List mode: Show tabs as CTRL-I is displayed, display $ after end of line. Useful to see the difference between tabs and spaces and for trailing blanks. Further changed by the 'listchars' option. The cursor is displayed at the start of the space a Tab character occupies, not at the end as usual in Normal mode. To get this cursor position while displaying Tabs with spaces, use: > :set list lcs=tab:\ \ < Note that list mode will also affect formatting (set with 'textwidth' or 'wrapmargin') when 'cpoptions' includes 'L'. See 'listchars' for changing the way tabs are displayed. *'listchars'* *'lcs'* 'listchars' 'lcs' string (default "eol:$") global {not in Vi} Strings to use in 'list' mode and for the |:list| command. It is a comma separated list of string settings. *lcs-eol* eol:c Character to show at the end of each line. When omitted, there is no extra character at the end of the line. *lcs-tab* tab:xy Two characters to be used to show a tab. The first char is used once. The second char is repeated to fill the space that the tab normally occupies. "tab:>-" will show a tab that takes four spaces as ">---". When omitted, a tab is show as ^I. *lcs-space* space:c Character to show for a space. When omitted, spaces are left blank. *lcs-trail* trail:c Character to show for trailing spaces. When omitted, trailing spaces are blank. Overrides the "space" setting for trailing spaces. *lcs-extends* extends:c Character to show in the last column, when 'wrap' is off and the line continues beyond the right of the screen. *lcs-precedes* precedes:c Character to show in the first column, when 'wrap' is off and there is text preceding the character visible in the first column. *lcs-conceal* conceal:c Character to show in place of concealed text, when 'conceallevel' is set to 1. *lcs-nbsp* nbsp:c Character to show for a non-breakable space character (0xA0 (160 decimal) and U+202F). Left blank when omitted. The characters ':' and ',' should not be used. UTF-8 characters can be used when 'encoding' is "utf-8", otherwise only printable characters are allowed. All characters must be single width. Examples: > :set lcs=tab:>-,trail:- :set lcs=tab:>-,eol:<,nbsp:% :set lcs=extends:>,precedes:< < The "NonText" highlighting will be used for "eol", "extends" and "precedes". "SpecialKey" for "nbsp", "space", "tab" and "trail". |hl-NonText| |hl-SpecialKey| *'lpl'* *'nolpl'* *'loadplugins'* *'noloadplugins'* 'loadplugins' 'lpl' boolean (default on) global {not in Vi} When on the plugin scripts are loaded when starting up |load-plugins|. This option can be reset in your |vimrc| file to disable the loading of plugins. Note that using the "-u NONE", "-u DEFAULTS" and "--noplugin" command line arguments reset this option. See |-u| and |--noplugin|. *'luadll'* 'luadll' string (default depends on the build) global {not in Vi} {only available when compiled with the |+lua/dyn| feature} Specifies the name of the Lua shared library. The default is DYNAMIC_LUA_DLL, which was specified at compile time. Environment variables are expanded |:set_env|. This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for security reasons. *'macatsui'* *'nomacatsui'* 'macatsui' boolean (default on) global {only available in Mac GUI version} This is a workaround for when drawing doesn't work properly. When set and compiled with multi-byte support ATSUI text drawing is used. When not set ATSUI text drawing is not used. Switch this option off when you experience drawing problems. In a future version the problems may be solved and this option becomes obsolete. Therefore use this method to unset it: > if exists('&macatsui') set nomacatsui endif < Another option to check if you have drawing problems is 'termencoding'. *'magic'* *'nomagic'* 'magic' boolean (default on) global Changes the special characters that can be used in search patterns. See |pattern|. WARNING: Switching this option off most likely breaks plugins! That is because many patterns assume it's on and will fail when it's off. Only switch it off when working with old Vi scripts. In any other situation write patterns that work when 'magic' is on. Include "\M" when you want to |/\M|. *'makeef'* *'mef'* 'makeef' 'mef' string (default: "") global {not in Vi} {not available when compiled without the |+quickfix| feature} Name of the errorfile for the |:make| command (see |:make_makeprg|) and the |:grep| command. When it is empty, an internally generated temp file will be used. When "##" is included, it is replaced by a number to make the name unique. This makes sure that the ":make" command doesn't overwrite an existing file. NOT used for the ":cf" command. See 'errorfile' for that. Environment variables are expanded |:set_env|. See |option-backslash| about including spaces and backslashes. This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for security reasons. *'makeencoding'* *'menc'* 'makeencoding' 'menc' string (default "") global or local to buffer |global-local| {only available when compiled with the |+multi_byte| feature} {not in Vi} Encoding used for reading the output of external commands. When empty, encoding is not converted. This is used for `:make`, `:lmake`, `:grep`, `:lgrep`, `:grepadd`, `:lgrepadd`, `:cfile`, `:cgetfile`, `:caddfile`, `:lfile`, `:lgetfile`, and `:laddfile`. This would be mostly useful when you use MS-Windows and set 'encoding' to "utf-8". If |+iconv| is enabled and GNU libiconv is used, setting 'makeencoding' to "char" has the same effect as setting to the system locale encoding. Example: > :set encoding=utf-8 :set makeencoding=char " system locale is used < *'makeprg'* *'mp'* 'makeprg' 'mp' string (default "make", VMS: "MMS") global or local to buffer |global-local| {not in Vi} Program to use for the ":make" command. See |:make_makeprg|. This option may contain '%' and '#' characters (see |:_%| and |:_#|), which are expanded to the current and alternate file name. Use |::S| to escape file names in case they contain special characters. Environment variables are expanded |:set_env|. See |option-backslash| about including spaces and backslashes. Note that a '|' must be escaped twice: once for ":set" and once for the interpretation of a command. When you use a filter called "myfilter" do it like this: > :set makeprg=gmake\ \\\|\ myfilter < The placeholder "$*" can be given (even multiple times) to specify where the arguments will be included, for example: > :set makeprg=latex\ \\\\nonstopmode\ \\\\input\\{$*} < This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for security reasons. *'matchpairs'* *'mps'* 'matchpairs' 'mps' string (default "(:),{:},[:]") local to buffer {not in Vi} Characters that form pairs. The |%| command jumps from one to the other. Only character pairs are allowed that are different, thus you cannot jump between two double quotes. The characters must be separated by a colon. The pairs must be separated by a comma. Example for including '<' and '>' (HTML): > :set mps+=<:> < A more exotic example, to jump between the '=' and ';' in an assignment, useful for languages like C and Java: > :au FileType c,cpp,java set mps+==:; < For a more advanced way of using "%", see the matchit.vim plugin in the $VIMRUNTIME/pack/dist/opt/matchit directory. |add-local-help| *'matchtime'* *'mat'* 'matchtime' 'mat' number (default 5) global {not in Vi}{in Nvi} Tenths of a second to show the matching paren, when 'showmatch' is set. Note that this is not in milliseconds, like other options that set a time. This is to be compatible with Nvi. *'maxcombine'* *'mco'* 'maxcombine' 'mco' number (default 2) global {not in Vi} {only available when compiled with the |+multi_byte| feature} The maximum number of combining characters supported for displaying. Only used when 'encoding' is "utf-8". The default is OK for most languages. Hebrew may require 4. Maximum value is 6. Even when this option is set to 2 you can still edit text with more combining characters, you just can't see them. Use |g8| or |ga|. See |mbyte-combining|. *'maxfuncdepth'* *'mfd'* 'maxfuncdepth' 'mfd' number (default 100) global {not in Vi} {not available when compiled without the |+eval| feature} Maximum depth of function calls for user functions. This normally catches endless recursion. When using a recursive function with more depth, set 'maxfuncdepth' to a bigger number. But this will use more memory, there is the danger of failing when memory is exhausted. Increasing this limit above 200 also changes the maximum for Ex command resursion, see |E169|. See also |:function|. *'maxmapdepth'* *'mmd'* *E223* 'maxmapdepth' 'mmd' number (default 1000) global {not in Vi} Maximum number of times a mapping is done without resulting in a character to be used. This normally catches endless mappings, like ":map x y" with ":map y x". It still does not catch ":map g wg", because the 'w' is used before the next mapping is done. See also |key-mapping|. *'maxmem'* *'mm'* 'maxmem' 'mm' number (default between 256 to 5120 (system dependent) or half the amount of memory available) global {not in Vi} Maximum amount of memory (in Kbyte) to use for one buffer. When this limit is reached allocating extra memory for a buffer will cause other memory to be freed. The maximum usable value is about 2000000. Use this to work without a limit. The value is ignored when 'swapfile' is off. Also see 'maxmemtot'. *'maxmempattern'* *'mmp'* 'maxmempattern' 'mmp' number (default 1000) global {not in Vi} Maximum amount of memory (in Kbyte) to use for pattern matching. The maximum value is about 2000000. Use this to work without a limit. *E363* When Vim runs into the limit it gives an error message and mostly behaves like CTRL-C was typed. Running into the limit often means that the pattern is very inefficient or too complex. This may already happen with the pattern "\(.\)*" on a very long line. ".*" works much better. Vim may run out of memory before hitting the 'maxmempattern' limit. *'maxmemtot'* *'mmt'* 'maxmemtot' 'mmt' number (default between 2048 and 10240 (system dependent) or half the amount of memory available) global {not in Vi} Maximum amount of memory in Kbyte to use for all buffers together. The maximum usable value is about 2000000 (2 Gbyte). Use this to work without a limit. On 64 bit machines higher values might work. But hey, do you really need more than 2 Gbyte for text editing? Keep in mind that text is stored in the swap file, one can edit files > 2 Gbyte anyway. We do need the memory to store undo info. Buffers with 'swapfile' off still count to the total amount of memory used. Also see 'maxmem'. *'menuitems'* *'mis'* 'menuitems' 'mis' number (default 25) global {not in Vi} {not available when compiled without the |+menu| feature} Maximum number of items to use in a menu. Used for menus that are generated from a list of items, e.g., the Buffers menu. Changing this option has no direct effect, the menu must be refreshed first. *'mkspellmem'* *'msm'* 'mkspellmem' 'msm' string (default "460000,2000,500") global {not in Vi} {not available when compiled without the |+syntax| feature} Parameters for |:mkspell|. This tunes when to start compressing the word tree. Compression can be slow when there are many words, but it's needed to avoid running out of memory. The amount of memory used per word depends very much on how similar the words are, that's why this tuning is complicated. There are three numbers, separated by commas: {start},{inc},{added} For most languages the uncompressed word tree fits in memory. {start} gives the amount of memory in Kbyte that can be used before any compression is done. It should be a bit smaller than the amount of memory that is available to Vim. When going over the {start} limit the {inc} number specifies the amount of memory in Kbyte that can be allocated before another compression is done. A low number means compression is done after less words are added, which is slow. A high number means more memory will be allocated. After doing compression, {added} times 1024 words can be added before the {inc} limit is ignored and compression is done when any extra amount of memory is needed. A low number means there is a smaller chance of hitting the {inc} limit, less memory is used but it's slower. The languages for which these numbers are important are Italian and Hungarian. The default works for when you have about 512 Mbyte. If you have 1 Gbyte you could use: > :set mkspellmem=900000,3000,800 < If you have less than 512 Mbyte |:mkspell| may fail for some languages, no matter what you set 'mkspellmem' to. This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|. *'modeline'* *'ml'* *'nomodeline'* *'noml'* 'modeline' 'ml' boolean (Vim default: on (off for root), Vi default: off) local to buffer *'modelines'* *'mls'* If 'modeline' is on 'modelines' gives the number of lines that is checked for set commands. If 'modeline' is off or 'modelines' is zero no lines are checked. See |modeline|. *'modelineexpr'* *'mle'* *'nomodelineexpr'* *'nomle'* 'modelineexpr' 'mle' boolean (default: off) global When on allow some options that are an expression to be set in the modeline. Check the option for whether it is affected by 'modelineexpr'. Also see |modeline|. This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for security reasons. 'modelines' 'mls' number (default 5) global {not in Vi} If 'modeline' is on 'modelines' gives the number of lines that is checked for set commands. If 'modeline' is off or 'modelines' is zero no lines are checked. See |modeline|. NOTE: 'modeline' is set to the Vi default value when 'compatible' is set and to the Vim default value when 'compatible' is reset. *'modifiable'* *'ma'* *'nomodifiable'* *'noma'* *E21* 'modifiable' 'ma' boolean (default on) local to buffer When off the buffer contents cannot be changed. The 'fileformat' and 'fileencoding' options also can't be changed. Can be reset on startup with the |-M| command line argument. *'modified'* *'mod'* *'nomodified'* *'nomod'* 'modified' 'mod' boolean (default off) local to buffer {not in Vi} When on, the buffer is considered to be modified. This option is set when: 1. A change was made to the text since it was last written. Using the |undo| command to go back to the original text will reset the option. But undoing changes that were made before writing the buffer will set the option again, since the text is different from when it was written. 2. 'fileformat' or 'fileencoding' is different from its original value. The original value is set when the buffer is read or written. A ":set nomodified" command also resets the original values to the current values and the 'modified' option will be reset. Similarly for 'eol' and 'bomb'. This option is not set when a change is made to the buffer as the result of a BufNewFile, BufRead/BufReadPost, BufWritePost, FileAppendPost or VimLeave autocommand event. See |gzip-example| for an explanation. When 'buftype' is "nowrite" or "nofile" this option may be set, but will be ignored. Note that the text may actually be the same, e.g. 'modified' is set when using "rA" on an "A". *'more'* *'nomore'* 'more' boolean (Vim default: on, Vi default: off) global {not in Vi} When on, listings pause when the whole screen is filled. You will get the |more-prompt|. When this option is off there are no pauses, the listing continues until finished. NOTE: This option is set to the Vi default value when 'compatible' is set and to the Vim default value when 'compatible' is reset. *'mouse'* *E538* 'mouse' string (default "", "a" for GUI, MS-DOS and Win32, set to "a" in |defaults.vim|) global {not in Vi} Enable the use of the mouse. Only works for certain terminals (xterm, MS-DOS, Win32 |win32-mouse|, QNX pterm, *BSD console with sysmouse and Linux console with gpm). For using the mouse in the GUI, see |gui-mouse|. The mouse can be enabled for different modes: n Normal mode and Terminal modes v Visual mode i Insert mode c Command-line mode h all previous modes when editing a help file a all previous modes r for |hit-enter| and |more-prompt| prompt Normally you would enable the mouse in all four modes with: > :set mouse=a < When the mouse is not enabled, the GUI will still use the mouse for modeless selection. This doesn't move the text cursor. See |mouse-using|. Also see |'clipboard'|. Note: When enabling the mouse in a terminal, copy/paste will use the "* register if there is access to an X-server. The xterm handling of the mouse buttons can still be used by keeping the shift key pressed. Also see the 'clipboard' option. *'mousefocus'* *'mousef'* *'nomousefocus'* *'nomousef'* 'mousefocus' 'mousef' boolean (default off) global {not in Vi} {only works in the GUI} The window that the mouse pointer is on is automatically activated. When changing the window layout or window focus in another way, the mouse pointer is moved to the window with keyboard focus. Off is the default because it makes using the pull down menus a little goofy, as a pointer transit may activate a window unintentionally. *'mousehide'* *'mh'* *'nomousehide'* *'nomh'* 'mousehide' 'mh' boolean (default on) global {not in Vi} {only works in the GUI} When on, the mouse pointer is hidden when characters are typed. The mouse pointer is restored when the mouse is moved. *'mousemodel'* *'mousem'* 'mousemodel' 'mousem' string (default "extend", "popup" for MS-DOS and Win32) global {not in Vi} Sets the model to use for the mouse. The name mostly specifies what the right mouse button is used for: extend Right mouse button extends a selection. This works like in an xterm. popup Right mouse button pops up a menu. The shifted left mouse button extends a selection. This works like with Microsoft Windows. popup_setpos Like "popup", but the cursor will be moved to the position where the mouse was clicked, and thus the selected operation will act upon the clicked object. If clicking inside a selection, that selection will be acted upon, i.e. no cursor move. This implies of course, that right clicking outside a selection will end Visual mode. Overview of what button does what for each model: mouse extend popup(_setpos) ~ left click place cursor place cursor left drag start selection start selection shift-left search word extend selection right click extend selection popup menu (place cursor) right drag extend selection - middle click paste paste In the "popup" model the right mouse button produces a pop-up menu. You need to define this first, see |popup-menu|. In a terminal the popup menu works if Vim is compiled with the |+insert_expand| option. Note that you can further refine the meaning of buttons with mappings. See |gui-mouse-mapping|. But mappings are NOT used for modeless selection (because that's handled in the GUI code directly). The 'mousemodel' option is set by the |:behave| command. *'mouseshape'* *'mouses'* *E547* 'mouseshape' 'mouses' string (default "i:beam,r:beam,s:updown,sd:cross, m:no,ml:up-arrow,v:rightup-arrow") global {not in Vi} {only available when compiled with the |+mouseshape| feature} This option tells Vim what the mouse pointer should look like in different modes. The option is a comma separated list of parts, much like used for 'guicursor'. Each part consist of a mode/location-list and an argument-list: mode-list:shape,mode-list:shape,.. The mode-list is a dash separated list of these modes/locations: In a normal window: ~ n Normal mode v Visual mode ve Visual mode with 'selection' "exclusive" (same as 'v', if not specified) o Operator-pending mode i Insert mode r Replace mode Others: ~ c appending to the command-line ci inserting in the command-line cr replacing in the command-line m at the 'Hit ENTER' or 'More' prompts ml idem, but cursor in the last line e any mode, pointer below last window s any mode, pointer on a status line sd any mode, while dragging a status line vs any mode, pointer on a vertical separator line vd any mode, while dragging a vertical separator line a everywhere The shape is one of the following: avail name looks like ~ w x arrow Normal mouse pointer w x blank no pointer at all (use with care!) w x beam I-beam w x updown up-down sizing arrows w x leftright left-right sizing arrows w x busy The system's usual busy pointer w x no The system's usual 'no input' pointer x udsizing indicates up-down resizing x lrsizing indicates left-right resizing x crosshair like a big thin + x hand1 black hand x hand2 white hand x pencil what you write with x question big ? x rightup-arrow arrow pointing right-up w x up-arrow arrow pointing up x <number> any X11 pointer number (see X11/cursorfont.h) The "avail" column contains a 'w' if the shape is available for Win32, x for X11. Any modes not specified or shapes not available use the normal mouse pointer. Example: > :set mouseshape=s:udsizing,m:no < will make the mouse turn to a sizing arrow over the status lines and indicate no input when the hit-enter prompt is displayed (since clicking the mouse has no effect in this state.) *'mousetime'* *'mouset'* 'mousetime' 'mouset' number (default 500) global {not in Vi} Only for GUI, MS-DOS, Win32 and Unix with xterm. Defines the maximum time in msec between two mouse clicks for the second click to be recognized as a multi click. *'mzschemedll'* 'mzschemedll' string (default depends on the build) global {not in Vi} {only available when compiled with the |+mzscheme/dyn| feature} Specifies the name of the MzScheme shared library. The default is DYNAMIC_MZSCH_DLL which was specified at compile time. Environment variables are expanded |:set_env|. The value must be set in the |vimrc| script or earlier. In the startup, before the |load-plugins| step. This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for security reasons. *'mzschemegcdll'* 'mzschemegcdll' string (default depends on the build) global {not in Vi} {only available when compiled with the |+mzscheme/dyn| feature} Specifies the name of the MzScheme GC shared library. The default is DYNAMIC_MZGC_DLL which was specified at compile time. The value can be equal to 'mzschemedll' if it includes the GC code. Environment variables are expanded |:set_env|. This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for security reasons. *'mzquantum'* *'mzq'* 'mzquantum' 'mzq' number (default 100) global {not in Vi} {not available when compiled without the |+mzscheme| feature} The number of milliseconds between polls for MzScheme threads. Negative or zero value means no thread scheduling. NOTE: This option is set to the Vim default value when 'compatible' is reset. *'nrformats'* *'nf'* 'nrformats' 'nf' string (default "bin,octal,hex", set to "bin,hex" in |defaults.vim|) local to buffer {not in Vi} This defines what bases Vim will consider for numbers when using the CTRL-A and CTRL-X commands for adding to and subtracting from a number respectively; see |CTRL-A| for more info on these commands. alpha If included, single alphabetical characters will be incremented or decremented. This is useful for a list with a letter index a), b), etc. *octal-nrformats* octal If included, numbers that start with a zero will be considered to be octal. Example: Using CTRL-A on "007" results in "010". hex If included, numbers starting with "0x" or "0X" will be considered to be hexadecimal. Example: Using CTRL-X on "0x100" results in "0x0ff". bin If included, numbers starting with "0b" or "0B" will be considered to be binary. Example: Using CTRL-X on "0b1000" subtracts one, resulting in "0b0111". Numbers which simply begin with a digit in the range 1-9 are always considered decimal. This also happens for numbers that are not recognized as octal or hex. *'number'* *'nu'* *'nonumber'* *'nonu'* 'number' 'nu' boolean (default off) local to window Print the line number in front of each line. When the 'n' option is excluded from 'cpoptions' a wrapped line will not use the column of line numbers (this is the default when 'compatible' isn't set). The 'numberwidth' option can be used to set the room used for the line number. When a long, wrapped line doesn't start with the first character, '-' characters are put before the number. See |hl-LineNr| and |hl-CursorLineNr| for the highlighting used for the number. *number_relativenumber* The 'relativenumber' option changes the displayed number to be relative to the cursor. Together with 'number' there are these four combinations (cursor in line 3): 'nonu' 'nu' 'nonu' 'nu' 'nornu' 'nornu' 'rnu' 'rnu' |apple | 1 apple | 2 apple | 2 apple |pear | 2 pear | 1 pear | 1 pear |nobody | 3 nobody | 0 nobody |3 nobody |there | 4 there | 1 there | 1 there *'numberwidth'* *'nuw'* 'numberwidth' 'nuw' number (Vim default: 4 Vi default: 8) local to window {not in Vi} {only available when compiled with the |+linebreak| feature} Minimal number of columns to use for the line number. Only relevant when the 'number' or 'relativenumber' option is set or printing lines with a line number. Since one space is always between the number and the text, there is one less character for the number itself. The value is the minimum width. A bigger width is used when needed to fit the highest line number in the buffer respectively the number of rows in the window, depending on whether 'number' or 'relativenumber' is set. Thus with the Vim default of 4 there is room for a line number up to 999. When the buffer has 1000 lines five columns will be used. The minimum value is 1, the maximum value is 10. NOTE: This option is set to the Vi default value when 'compatible' is set and to the Vim default value when 'compatible' is reset. *'omnifunc'* *'ofu'* 'omnifunc' 'ofu' string (default: empty) local to buffer {not in Vi} {not available when compiled without the |+eval| or |+insert_expand| features} This option specifies a function to be used for Insert mode omni completion with CTRL-X CTRL-O. |i_CTRL-X_CTRL-O| See |complete-functions| for an explanation of how the function is invoked and what it should return. This option is usually set by a filetype plugin: |:filetype-plugin-on| This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for security reasons. *'opendevice'* *'odev'* *'noopendevice'* *'noodev'* 'opendevice' 'odev' boolean (default off) global {not in Vi} {only for MS-DOS, MS-Windows and OS/2} Enable reading and writing from devices. This may get Vim stuck on a device that can be opened but doesn't actually do the I/O. Therefore it is off by default. Note that on MS-Windows editing "aux.h", "lpt1.txt" and the like also result in editing a device. *'operatorfunc'* *'opfunc'* 'operatorfunc' 'opfunc' string (default: empty) global {not in Vi} This option specifies a function to be called by the |g@| operator. See |:map-operator| for more info and an example. This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for security reasons. *'osfiletype'* *'oft'* 'osfiletype' 'oft' string (default: "") local to buffer {not in Vi} This option was supported on RISC OS, which has been removed. *'packpath'* *'pp'* 'packpath' 'pp' string (default: see 'runtimepath') {not in Vi} Directories used to find packages. See |packages|. *'paragraphs'* *'para'* 'paragraphs' 'para' string (default "IPLPPPQPP TPHPLIPpLpItpplpipbp") global Specifies the nroff macros that separate paragraphs. These are pairs of two letters (see |object-motions|). *'paste'* *'nopaste'* 'paste' boolean (default off) global {not in Vi} Put Vim in Paste mode. This is useful if you want to cut or copy some text from one window and paste it in Vim. This will avoid unexpected effects. Setting this option is useful when using Vim in a terminal, where Vim cannot distinguish between typed text and pasted text. In the GUI, Vim knows about pasting and will mostly do the right thing without 'paste' being set. The same is true for a terminal where Vim handles the mouse clicks itself. This option is reset when starting the GUI. Thus if you set it in your .vimrc it will work in a terminal, but not in the GUI. Setting 'paste' in the GUI has side effects: e.g., the Paste toolbar button will no longer work in Insert mode, because it uses a mapping. When the 'paste' option is switched on (also when it was already on): - mapping in Insert mode and Command-line mode is disabled - abbreviations are disabled - 'autoindent' is reset - 'expandtab' is reset - 'formatoptions' is used like it is empty - 'revins' is reset - 'ruler' is reset - 'showmatch' is reset - 'smartindent' is reset - 'smarttab' is reset - 'softtabstop' is set to 0 - 'textwidth' is set to 0 - 'wrapmargin' is set to 0 These options keep their value, but their effect is disabled: - 'cindent' - 'indentexpr' - 'lisp' NOTE: When you start editing another file while the 'paste' option is on, settings from the modelines or autocommands may change the settings again, causing trouble when pasting text. You might want to set the 'paste' option again. When the 'paste' option is reset the mentioned options are restored to the value before the moment 'paste' was switched from off to on. Resetting 'paste' before ever setting it does not have any effect. Since mapping doesn't work while 'paste' is active, you need to use the 'pastetoggle' option to toggle the 'paste' option with some key. *'pastetoggle'* *'pt'* 'pastetoggle' 'pt' string (default "") global {not in Vi} When non-empty, specifies the key sequence that toggles the 'paste' option. This is like specifying a mapping: > :map {keys} :set invpaste<CR> < Where {keys} is the value of 'pastetoggle'. The difference is that it will work even when 'paste' is set. 'pastetoggle' works in Insert mode and Normal mode, but not in Command-line mode. Mappings are checked first, thus overrule 'pastetoggle'. However, when 'paste' is on mappings are ignored in Insert mode, thus you can do this: > :map <F10> :set paste<CR> :map <F11> :set nopaste<CR> :imap <F10> <C-O>:set paste<CR> :imap <F11> <nop> :set pastetoggle=<F11> < This will make <F10> start paste mode and <F11> stop paste mode. Note that typing <F10> in paste mode inserts "<F10>", since in paste mode everything is inserted literally, except the 'pastetoggle' key sequence. When the value has several bytes 'ttimeoutlen' applies. *'pex'* *'patchexpr'* 'patchexpr' 'pex' string (default "") global {not in Vi} {not available when compiled without the |+diff| feature} Expression which is evaluated to apply a patch to a file and generate the resulting new version of the file. See |diff-patchexpr|. *'patchmode'* *'pm'* *E205* *E206* 'patchmode' 'pm' string (default "") global {not in Vi} When non-empty the oldest version of a file is kept. This can be used to keep the original version of a file if you are changing files in a source distribution. Only the first time that a file is written a copy of the original file will be kept. The name of the copy is the name of the original file with the string in the 'patchmode' option appended. This option should start with a dot. Use a string like ".orig" or ".org". 'backupdir' must not be empty for this to work (Detail: The backup file is renamed to the patchmode file after the new file has been successfully written, that's why it must be possible to write a backup file). If there was no file to be backed up, an empty file is created. When the 'backupskip' pattern matches, a patchmode file is not made. Using 'patchmode' for compressed files appends the extension at the end (e.g., "file.gz.orig"), thus the resulting name isn't always recognized as a compressed file. Only normal file name characters can be used, "/\*?[|<>" are illegal. *'path'* *'pa'* *E343* *E345* *E347* *E854* 'path' 'pa' string (default on Unix: ".,/usr/include,," on OS/2: ".,/emx/include,," other systems: ".,,") global or local to buffer |global-local| {not in Vi} This is a list of directories which will be searched when using the |gf|, [f, ]f, ^Wf, |:find|, |:sfind|, |:tabfind| and other commands, provided that the file being searched for has a relative path (not starting with "/", "./" or "../"). The directories in the 'path' option may be relative or absolute. - Use commas to separate directory names: > :set path=.,/usr/local/include,/usr/include < - Spaces can also be used to separate directory names (for backwards compatibility with version 3.0). To have a space in a directory name, precede it with an extra backslash, and escape the space: > :set path=.,/dir/with\\\ space < - To include a comma in a directory name precede it with an extra backslash: > :set path=.,/dir/with\\,comma < - To search relative to the directory of the current file, use: > :set path=. < - To search in the current directory use an empty string between two commas: > :set path=,, < - A directory name may end in a ':' or '/'. - Environment variables are expanded |:set_env|. - When using |netrw.vim| URLs can be used. For example, adding "http://www.vim.org" will make ":find index.html" work. - Search upwards and downwards in a directory tree using "*", "**" and ";". See |file-searching| for info and syntax. {not available when compiled without the |+path_extra| feature} - Careful with '\' characters, type two to get one in the option: > :set path=.,c:\\include < Or just use '/' instead: > :set path=.,c:/include < Don't forget "." or files won't even be found in the same directory as the file! The maximum length is limited. How much depends on the system, mostly it is something like 256 or 1024 characters. You can check if all the include files are found, using the value of 'path', see |:checkpath|. The use of |:set+=| and |:set-=| is preferred when adding or removing directories from the list. This avoids problems when a future version uses another default. To remove the current directory use: > :set path-= < To add the current directory use: > :set path+= < To use an environment variable, you probably need to replace the separator. Here is an example to append $INCL, in which directory names are separated with a semi-colon: > :let &path = &path . "," . substitute($INCL, ';', ',', 'g') < Replace the ';' with a ':' or whatever separator is used. Note that this doesn't work when $INCL contains a comma or white space. *'perldll'* 'perldll' string (default depends on the build) global {not in Vi} {only available when compiled with the |+perl/dyn| feature} Specifies the name of the Perl shared library. The default is DYNAMIC_PERL_DLL, which was specified at compile time. Environment variables are expanded |:set_env|. This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for security reasons. *'preserveindent'* *'pi'* *'nopreserveindent'* *'nopi'* 'preserveindent' 'pi' boolean (default off) local to buffer {not in Vi} When changing the indent of the current line, preserve as much of the indent structure as possible. Normally the indent is replaced by a series of tabs followed by spaces as required (unless |'expandtab'| is enabled, in which case only spaces are used). Enabling this option means the indent will preserve as many existing characters as possible for indenting, and only add additional tabs or spaces as required. 'expandtab' does not apply to the preserved white space, a Tab remains a Tab. NOTE: When using ">>" multiple times the resulting indent is a mix of tabs and spaces. You might not like this. NOTE: This option is reset when 'compatible' is set. Also see 'copyindent'. Use |:retab| to clean up white space. *'previewheight'* *'pvh'* 'previewheight' 'pvh' number (default 12) global {not in Vi} {not available when compiled without the |+windows| or |+quickfix| features} Default height for a preview window. Used for |:ptag| and associated commands. Used for |CTRL-W_}| when no count is given. *'previewwindow'* *'nopreviewwindow'* *'pvw'* *'nopvw'* *E590* 'previewwindow' 'pvw' boolean (default off) local to window {not in Vi} {not available when compiled without the |+windows| or |+quickfix| features} Identifies the preview window. Only one window can have this option set. It's normally not set directly, but by using one of the commands |:ptag|, |:pedit|, etc. *'printdevice'* *'pdev'* 'printdevice' 'pdev' string (default empty) global {not in Vi} {only available when compiled with the |+printer| feature} The name of the printer to be used for |:hardcopy|. See |pdev-option|. This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for security reasons. *'printencoding'* *'penc'* 'printencoding' 'penc' String (default empty, except for some systems) global {not in Vi} {only available when compiled with the |+printer| and |+postscript| features} Sets the character encoding used when printing. See |penc-option|. *'printexpr'* *'pexpr'* 'printexpr' 'pexpr' String (default: see below) global {not in Vi} {only available when compiled with the |+printer| and |+postscript| features} Expression used to print the PostScript produced with |:hardcopy|. See |pexpr-option|. This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for security reasons. *'printfont'* *'pfn'* 'printfont' 'pfn' string (default "courier") global {not in Vi} {only available when compiled with the |+printer| feature} The name of the font that will be used for |:hardcopy|. See |pfn-option|. *'printheader'* *'pheader'* 'printheader' 'pheader' string (default "%<%f%h%m%=Page %N") global {not in Vi} {only available when compiled with the |+printer| feature} The format of the header produced in |:hardcopy| output. See |pheader-option|. This option cannot be set in a modeline when 'modelineexpr' is off. *'printmbcharset'* *'pmbcs'* 'printmbcharset' 'pmbcs' string (default "") global {not in Vi} {only available when compiled with the |+printer|, |+postscript| and |+multi_byte| features} The CJK character set to be used for CJK output from |:hardcopy|. See |pmbcs-option|. *'printmbfont'* *'pmbfn'* 'printmbfont' 'pmbfn' string (default "") global {not in Vi} {only available when compiled with the |+printer|, |+postscript| and |+multi_byte| features} List of font names to be used for CJK output from |:hardcopy|. See |pmbfn-option|. *'printoptions'* *'popt'* 'printoptions' 'popt' string (default "") global {not in Vi} {only available when compiled with |+printer| feature} List of items that control the format of the output of |:hardcopy|. See |popt-option|. *'prompt'* *'noprompt'* 'prompt' boolean (default on) global When on a ":" prompt is used in Ex mode. *'pumheight'* *'ph'* 'pumheight' 'ph' number (default 0) global {not available when compiled without the |+insert_expand| feature} {not in Vi} Determines the maximum number of items to show in the popup menu for Insert mode completion. When zero as much space as available is used. |ins-completion-menu|. *'pumwidth'* *'pw'* 'pumwidth' 'pw' number (default 15) global {not available when compiled without the |+insert_expand| feature} {not in Vi} Determines the minimum width to use for the popup menu for Insert mode completion. |ins-completion-menu|. *'pythondll'* 'pythondll' string (default depends on the build) global {not in Vi} {only available when compiled with the |+python/dyn| feature} Specifies the name of the Python 2.x shared library. The default is DYNAMIC_PYTHON_DLL, which was specified at compile time. Environment variables are expanded |:set_env|. This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for security reasons. *'pythonhome'* 'pythonhome' string (default "") global {not in Vi} {only available when compiled with the |+python/dyn| feature} Specifies the name of the Python 2.x home directory. When 'pythonhome' and the PYTHONHOME environment variable are not set, PYTHON_HOME, which was specified at compile time, will be used for the Python 2.x home directory. Environment variables are expanded |:set_env|. This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for security reasons. *'pythonthreedll'* 'pythonthreedll' string (default depends on the build) global {not in Vi} {only available when compiled with the |+python3/dyn| feature} Specifies the name of the Python 3 shared library. The default is DYNAMIC_PYTHON3_DLL, which was specified at compile time. Environment variables are expanded |:set_env|. This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for security reasons. *'pythonthreehome'* 'pythonthreehome' string (default "") global {not in Vi} {only available when compiled with the |+python3/dyn| feature} Specifies the name of the Python 3 home directory. When 'pythonthreehome' and the PYTHONHOME environment variable are not set, PYTHON3_HOME, which was specified at compile time, will be used for the Python 3 home directory. Environment variables are expanded |:set_env|. This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for security reasons. *'pyxversion'* *'pyx'* 'pyxversion' 'pyx' number (default depends on the build) global {not in Vi} {only available when compiled with the |+python| or the |+python3| feature} Specifies the python version used for pyx* functions and commands |python_x|. The default value is as follows: Compiled with Default ~ |+python| and |+python3| 0 only |+python| 2 only |+python3| 3 Available values are 0, 2 and 3. If 'pyxversion' is 0, it is set to 2 or 3 after the first execution of any python2/3 commands or functions. E.g. `:py` sets to 2, and `:py3` sets to 3. `:pyx` sets it to 3 if Python 3 is available, otherwise sets to 2 if Python 2 is available. See also: |has-pythonx| If Vim is compiled with only |+python| or |+python3| setting 'pyxversion' has no effect. The pyx* functions and commands are always the same as the compiled version. This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for security reasons. *'quoteescape'* *'qe'* 'quoteescape' 'qe' string (default "\") local to buffer {not in Vi} The characters that are used to escape quotes in a string. Used for objects like a', a" and a` |a'|. When one of the characters in this option is found inside a string, the following character will be skipped. The default value makes the text "foo\"bar\\" considered to be one string. *'readonly'* *'ro'* *'noreadonly'* *'noro'* 'readonly' 'ro' boolean (default off) local to buffer If on, writes fail unless you use a '!'. Protects you from accidentally overwriting a file. Default on when Vim is started in read-only mode ("vim -R") or when the executable is called "view". When using ":w!" the 'readonly' option is reset for the current buffer, unless the 'Z' flag is in 'cpoptions'. {not in Vi:} When using the ":view" command the 'readonly' option is set for the newly edited buffer. See 'modifiable' for disallowing changes to the buffer. *'redrawtime'* *'rdt'* 'redrawtime' 'rdt' number (default 2000) global {not in Vi} {only available when compiled with the |+reltime| feature} The time in milliseconds for redrawing the display. This applies to searching for patterns for 'hlsearch', |:match| highlighting an syntax highlighting. When redrawing takes more than this many milliseconds no further matches will be highlighted. For syntax highlighting the time applies per window. When over the limit syntax highlighting is disabled until |CTRL-L| is used. This is used to avoid that Vim hangs when using a very complicated pattern. *'regexpengine'* *'re'* 'regexpengine' 're' number (default 0) global {not in Vi} This selects the default regexp engine. |two-engines| The possible values are: 0 automatic selection 1 old engine 2 NFA engine Note that when using the NFA engine and the pattern contains something that is not supported the pattern will not match. This is only useful for debugging the regexp engine. Using automatic selection enables Vim to switch the engine, if the default engine becomes too costly. E.g., when the NFA engine uses too many states. This should prevent Vim from hanging on a combination of a complex pattern with long text. *'relativenumber'* *'rnu'* *'norelativenumber'* *'nornu'* 'relativenumber' 'rnu' boolean (default off) local to window {not in Vi} Show the line number relative to the line with the cursor in front of each line. Relative line numbers help you use the |count| you can precede some vertical motion commands (e.g. j k + -) with, without having to calculate it yourself. Especially useful in combination with other commands (e.g. y d c < > gq gw =). When the 'n' option is excluded from 'cpoptions' a wrapped line will not use the column of line numbers (this is the default when 'compatible' isn't set). The 'numberwidth' option can be used to set the room used for the line number. When a long, wrapped line doesn't start with the first character, '-' characters are put before the number. See |hl-LineNr| and |hl-CursorLineNr| for the highlighting used for the number. The number in front of the cursor line also depends on the value of 'number', see |number_relativenumber| for all combinations of the two options. *'remap'* *'noremap'* 'remap' boolean (default on) global Allows for mappings to work recursively. If you do not want this for a single entry, use the :noremap[!] command. NOTE: To avoid portability problems with Vim scripts, always keep this option at the default "on". Only switch it off when working with old Vi scripts. *'renderoptions'* *'rop'* 'renderoptions' 'rop' string (default: empty) global {not in Vi} {only available when compiled with GUI and DIRECTX on MS-Windows} Select a text renderer and set its options. The options depend on the renderer. Syntax: > set rop=type:{renderer}(,{name}:{value})* < Currently, only one optional renderer is available. render behavior ~ directx Vim will draw text using DirectX (DirectWrite). It makes drawn glyphs more beautiful than default GDI. It requires 'encoding' is "utf-8", and only works on MS-Windows Vista or newer version. Options: name meaning type value ~ gamma gamma float 1.0 - 2.2 (maybe) contrast enhancedContrast float (unknown) level clearTypeLevel float (unknown) geom pixelGeometry int 0 - 2 (see below) renmode renderingMode int 0 - 6 (see below) taamode textAntialiasMode int 0 - 3 (see below) scrlines Scroll Lines int (deprecated) See this URL for detail (except for scrlines): https://msdn.microsoft.com/en-us/library/dd368190.aspx For geom: structure of a device pixel. 0 - DWRITE_PIXEL_GEOMETRY_FLAT 1 - DWRITE_PIXEL_GEOMETRY_RGB 2 - DWRITE_PIXEL_GEOMETRY_BGR See this URL for detail: https://msdn.microsoft.com/en-us/library/dd368114.aspx For renmode: method of rendering glyphs. 0 - DWRITE_RENDERING_MODE_DEFAULT 1 - DWRITE_RENDERING_MODE_ALIASED 2 - DWRITE_RENDERING_MODE_GDI_CLASSIC 3 - DWRITE_RENDERING_MODE_GDI_NATURAL 4 - DWRITE_RENDERING_MODE_NATURAL 5 - DWRITE_RENDERING_MODE_NATURAL_SYMMETRIC 6 - DWRITE_RENDERING_MODE_OUTLINE See this URL for detail: https://msdn.microsoft.com/en-us/library/dd368118.aspx For taamode: antialiasing mode used for drawing text. 0 - D2D1_TEXT_ANTIALIAS_MODE_DEFAULT 1 - D2D1_TEXT_ANTIALIAS_MODE_CLEARTYPE 2 - D2D1_TEXT_ANTIALIAS_MODE_GRAYSCALE 3 - D2D1_TEXT_ANTIALIAS_MODE_ALIASED See this URL for detail: https://msdn.microsoft.com/en-us/library/dd368170.aspx For scrlines: This was used for optimizing scrolling behavior, however this is now deprecated. If specified, it is simply ignored. Example: > set encoding=utf-8 set gfn=Ricty_Diminished:h12 set rop=type:directx < If select a raster font (Courier, Terminal or FixedSys which have ".fon" extension in file name) to 'guifont', it will be drawn by GDI as a fallback. NOTE: It is known that some fonts and options combination causes trouble on drawing glyphs. - 'renmode:5' and 'renmode:6' will not work with some special made fonts (True-Type fonts which includes only bitmap glyphs). - 'taamode:3' will not work with some vector fonts. NOTE: With this option, you can display colored emoji (emoticon) in Windows 8.1 or later. To display colored emoji, there are some conditions which you should notice. - If your font includes non-colored emoji already, it will be used. - If your font doesn't have emoji, the system chooses an alternative symbol font. On Windows 10, "Segoe UI Emoji" will be used. - When this alternative font didn't have fixed width glyph, emoji might be rendered beyond the bounding box of drawing cell. Other render types are currently not supported. *'report'* 'report' number (default 2) global Threshold for reporting number of lines changed. When the number of changed lines is more than 'report' a message will be given for most ":" commands. If you want it always, set 'report' to 0. For the ":substitute" command the number of substitutions is used instead of the number of lines. *'restorescreen'* *'rs'* *'norestorescreen'* *'nors'* 'restorescreen' 'rs' boolean (default on) global {not in Vi} {only in Windows 95/NT console version} When set, the screen contents is restored when exiting Vim. This also happens when executing external commands. For non-Windows Vim: You can set or reset the 't_ti' and 't_te' options in your .vimrc. To disable restoring: set t_ti= t_te= To enable restoring (for an xterm): set t_ti=^[7^[[r^[[?47h t_te=^[[?47l^[8 (Where ^[ is an <Esc>, type CTRL-V <Esc> to insert it) *'revins'* *'ri'* *'norevins'* *'nori'* 'revins' 'ri' boolean (default off) global {not in Vi} {only available when compiled with the |+rightleft| feature} Inserting characters in Insert mode will work backwards. See "typing backwards" |ins-reverse|. This option can be toggled with the CTRL-_ command in Insert mode, when 'allowrevins' is set. NOTE: This option is reset when 'compatible' is set. This option is reset when 'paste' is set and restored when 'paste' is reset. *'rightleft'* *'rl'* *'norightleft'* *'norl'* 'rightleft' 'rl' boolean (default off) local to window {not in Vi} {only available when compiled with the |+rightleft| feature} When on, display orientation becomes right-to-left, i.e., characters that are stored in the file appear from the right to the left. Using this option, it is possible to edit files for languages that are written from the right to the left such as Hebrew and Arabic. This option is per window, so it is possible to edit mixed files simultaneously, or to view the same file in both ways (this is useful whenever you have a mixed text file with both right-to-left and left-to-right strings so that both sets are displayed properly in different windows). Also see |rileft.txt|. *'rightleftcmd'* *'rlc'* 'rightleftcmd' 'rlc' string (default "search") local to window {not in Vi} {only available when compiled with the |+rightleft| feature} Each word in this option enables the command line editing to work in right-to-left mode for a group of commands: search "/" and "?" commands This is useful for languages such as Hebrew, Arabic and Farsi. The 'rightleft' option must be set for 'rightleftcmd' to take effect. *'rubydll'* 'rubydll' string (default: depends on the build) global {not in Vi} {only available when compiled with the |+ruby/dyn| feature} Specifies the name of the Ruby shared library. The default is DYNAMIC_RUBY_DLL, which was specified at compile time. Environment variables are expanded |:set_env|. This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for security reasons. *'ruler'* *'ru'* *'noruler'* *'noru'* 'ruler' 'ru' boolean (default off, set in |defaults.vim|) global {not in Vi} {not available when compiled without the |+cmdline_info| feature} Show the line and column number of the cursor position, separated by a comma. When there is room, the relative position of the displayed text in the file is shown on the far right: Top first line is visible Bot last line is visible All first and last line are visible 45% relative position in the file If 'rulerformat' is set, it will determine the contents of the ruler. Each window has its own ruler. If a window has a status line, the ruler is shown there. Otherwise it is shown in the last line of the screen. If the statusline is given by 'statusline' (i.e. not empty), this option takes precedence over 'ruler' and 'rulerformat' If the number of characters displayed is different from the number of bytes in the text (e.g., for a TAB or a multi-byte character), both the text column (byte number) and the screen column are shown, separated with a dash. For an empty line "0-1" is shown. For an empty buffer the line number will also be zero: "0,0-1". This option is reset when 'paste' is set and restored when 'paste' is reset. If you don't want to see the ruler all the time but want to know where you are, use "g CTRL-G" |g_CTRL-G|. NOTE: This option is reset when 'compatible' is set. *'rulerformat'* *'ruf'* 'rulerformat' 'ruf' string (default empty) global {not in Vi} {not available when compiled without the |+statusline| feature} When this option is not empty, it determines the content of the ruler string, as displayed for the 'ruler' option. The format of this option is like that of 'statusline'. This option cannot be set in a modeline when 'modelineexpr' is off. The default ruler width is 17 characters. To make the ruler 15 characters wide, put "%15(" at the start and "%)" at the end. Example: > :set rulerformat=%15(%c%V\ %p%%%) < *'runtimepath'* *'rtp'* *vimfiles* 'runtimepath' 'rtp' string (default: Unix: "$HOME/.vim, $VIM/vimfiles, $VIMRUNTIME, $VIM/vimfiles/after, $HOME/.vim/after" Amiga: "home:vimfiles, $VIM/vimfiles, $VIMRUNTIME, $VIM/vimfiles/after, home:vimfiles/after" PC, OS/2: "$HOME/vimfiles, $VIM/vimfiles, $VIMRUNTIME, $VIM/vimfiles/after, $HOME/vimfiles/after" Macintosh: "$VIM:vimfiles, $VIMRUNTIME, $VIM:vimfiles:after" RISC-OS: "Choices:vimfiles, $VIMRUNTIME, Choices:vimfiles/after" VMS: "sys$login:vimfiles, $VIM/vimfiles, $VIMRUNTIME, $VIM/vimfiles/after, sys$login:vimfiles/after") global {not in Vi} This is a list of directories which will be searched for runtime files: filetype.vim filetypes by file name |new-filetype| scripts.vim filetypes by file contents |new-filetype-scripts| autoload/ automatically loaded scripts |autoload-functions| colors/ color scheme files |:colorscheme| compiler/ compiler files |:compiler| doc/ documentation |write-local-help| ftplugin/ filetype plugins |write-filetype-plugin| indent/ indent scripts |indent-expression| keymap/ key mapping files |mbyte-keymap| lang/ menu translations |:menutrans| menu.vim GUI menus |menu.vim| pack/ packages |:packadd| plugin/ plugin scripts |write-plugin| print/ files for printing |postscript-print-encoding| spell/ spell checking files |spell| syntax/ syntax files |mysyntaxfile| tutor/ files for vimtutor |tutor| And any other file searched for with the |:runtime| command. The defaults for most systems are setup to search five locations: 1. In your home directory, for your personal preferences. 2. In a system-wide Vim directory, for preferences from the system administrator. 3. In $VIMRUNTIME, for files distributed with Vim. *after-directory* 4. In the "after" directory in the system-wide Vim directory. This is for the system administrator to overrule or add to the distributed defaults (rarely needed) 5. In the "after" directory in your home directory. This is for personal preferences to overrule or add to the distributed defaults or system-wide settings (rarely needed). More entries are added when using |packages|. If it gets very long then `:set rtp` will be truncated, use `:echo &rtp` to see the full string. Note that, unlike 'path', no wildcards like "**" are allowed. Normal wildcards are allowed, but can significantly slow down searching for runtime files. For speed, use as few items as possible and avoid wildcards. See |:runtime|. Example: > :set runtimepath=~/vimruntime,/mygroup/vim,$VIMRUNTIME < This will use the directory "~/vimruntime" first (containing your personal Vim runtime files), then "/mygroup/vim" (shared between a group of people) and finally "$VIMRUNTIME" (the distributed runtime files). You probably should always include $VIMRUNTIME somewhere, to use the distributed runtime files. You can put a directory before $VIMRUNTIME to find files which replace a distributed runtime files. You can put a directory after $VIMRUNTIME to find files which add to distributed runtime files. When Vim is started with |--clean| the home directory entries are not included. This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for security reasons. *'scroll'* *'scr'* 'scroll' 'scr' number (default: half the window height) local to window Number of lines to scroll with CTRL-U and CTRL-D commands. Will be set to half the number of lines in the window when the window size changes. If you give a count to the CTRL-U or CTRL-D command it will be used as the new value for 'scroll'. Reset to half the window height with ":set scroll=0". {Vi is a bit different: 'scroll' gives the number of screen lines instead of file lines, makes a difference when lines wrap} *'scrollbind'* *'scb'* *'noscrollbind'* *'noscb'* 'scrollbind' 'scb' boolean (default off) local to window {not in Vi} See also |scroll-binding|. When this option is set, the current window scrolls as other scrollbind windows (windows that also have this option set) scroll. This option is useful for viewing the differences between two versions of a file, see 'diff'. See |'scrollopt'| for options that determine how this option should be interpreted. This option is mostly reset when splitting a window to edit another file. This means that ":split | edit file" results in two windows with scroll-binding, but ":split file" does not. *'scrolljump'* *'sj'* 'scrolljump' 'sj' number (default 1) global {not in Vi} Minimal number of lines to scroll when the cursor gets off the screen (e.g., with "j"). Not used for scroll commands (e.g., CTRL-E, CTRL-D). Useful if your terminal scrolls very slowly. When set to a negative number from -1 to -100 this is used as the percentage of the window height. Thus -50 scrolls half the window height. NOTE: This option is set to 1 when 'compatible' is set. *'scrolloff'* *'so'* 'scrolloff' 'so' number (default 0, set to 5 in |defaults.vim|) global {not in Vi} Minimal number of screen lines to keep above and below the cursor. This will make some context visible around where you are working. If you set it to a very large value (999) the cursor line will always be in the middle of the window (except at the start or end of the file or when long lines wrap). For scrolling horizontally see 'sidescrolloff'. NOTE: This option is set to 0 when 'compatible' is set. *'scrollopt'* *'sbo'* 'scrollopt' 'sbo' string (default "ver,jump") global {not in Vi} This is a comma-separated list of words that specifies how 'scrollbind' windows should behave. 'sbo' stands for ScrollBind Options. The following words are available: ver Bind vertical scrolling for 'scrollbind' windows hor Bind horizontal scrolling for 'scrollbind' windows jump Applies to the offset between two windows for vertical scrolling. This offset is the difference in the first displayed line of the bound windows. When moving around in a window, another 'scrollbind' window may reach a position before the start or after the end of the buffer. The offset is not changed though, when moving back the 'scrollbind' window will try to scroll to the desired position when possible. When now making that window the current one, two things can be done with the relative offset: 1. When "jump" is not included, the relative offset is adjusted for the scroll position in the new current window. When going back to the other window, the new relative offset will be used. 2. When "jump" is included, the other windows are scrolled to keep the same relative offset. When going back to the other window, it still uses the same relative offset. Also see |scroll-binding|. When 'diff' mode is active there always is vertical scroll binding, even when "ver" isn't there. *'sections'* *'sect'* 'sections' 'sect' string (default "SHNHH HUnhsh") global Specifies the nroff macros that separate sections. These are pairs of two letters (See |object-motions|). The default makes a section start at the nroff macros ".SH", ".NH", ".H", ".HU", ".nh" and ".sh". *'secure'* *'nosecure'* *E523* 'secure' boolean (default off) global {not in Vi} When on, ":autocmd", shell and write commands are not allowed in ".vimrc" and ".exrc" in the current directory and map commands are displayed. Switch it off only if you know that you will not run into problems, or when the 'exrc' option is off. On Unix this option is only used if the ".vimrc" or ".exrc" is not owned by you. This can be dangerous if the systems allows users to do a "chown". You better set 'secure' at the end of your ~/.vimrc then. This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for security reasons. *'selection'* *'sel'* 'selection' 'sel' string (default "inclusive") global {not in Vi} This option defines the behavior of the selection. It is only used in Visual and Select mode. Possible values: value past line inclusive ~ old no yes inclusive yes yes exclusive yes no "past line" means that the cursor is allowed to be positioned one character past the line. "inclusive" means that the last character of the selection is included in an operation. For example, when "x" is used to delete the selection. When "old" is used and 'virtualedit' allows the cursor to move past the end of line the line break still isn't included. Note that when "exclusive" is used and selecting from the end backwards, you cannot include the last character of a line, when starting in Normal mode and 'virtualedit' empty. The 'selection' option is set by the |:behave| command. *'selectmode'* *'slm'* 'selectmode' 'slm' string (default "") global {not in Vi} This is a comma separated list of words, which specifies when to start Select mode instead of Visual mode, when a selection is started. Possible values: mouse when using the mouse key when using shifted special keys cmd when using "v", "V" or CTRL-V See |Select-mode|. The 'selectmode' option is set by the |:behave| command. *'sessionoptions'* *'ssop'* 'sessionoptions' 'ssop' string (default: "blank,buffers,curdir,folds, help,options,tabpages,winsize,terminal") global {not in Vi} {not available when compiled without the |+mksession| feature} Changes the effect of the |:mksession| command. It is a comma separated list of words. Each word enables saving and restoring something: word save and restore ~ blank empty windows buffers hidden and unloaded buffers, not just those in windows curdir the current directory folds manually created folds, opened/closed folds and local fold options globals global variables that start with an uppercase letter and contain at least one lowercase letter. Only String and Number types are stored. help the help window localoptions options and mappings local to a window or buffer (not global values for local options) options all options and mappings (also global values for local options) resize size of the Vim window: 'lines' and 'columns' sesdir the directory in which the session file is located will become the current directory (useful with projects accessed over a network from different systems) slash backslashes in file names replaced with forward slashes tabpages all tab pages; without this only the current tab page is restored, so that you can make a session for each tab page separately terminal include terminal windows where the command can be restored unix with Unix end-of-line format (single <NL>), even when on Windows or DOS winpos position of the whole Vim window winsize window sizes Don't include both "curdir" and "sesdir". When neither "curdir" nor "sesdir" is included, file names are stored with absolute paths. "slash" and "unix" are useful on Windows when sharing session files with Unix. The Unix version of Vim cannot source dos format scripts, but the Windows version of Vim can source unix format scripts. *'shell'* *'sh'* *E91* 'shell' 'sh' string (default $SHELL or "sh", MS-DOS and Win32: "command.com" or "cmd.exe", OS/2: "cmd") global Name of the shell to use for ! and :! commands. When changing the value also check these options: 'shelltype', 'shellpipe', 'shellslash' 'shellredir', 'shellquote', 'shellxquote' and 'shellcmdflag'. It is allowed to give an argument to the command, e.g. "csh -f". See |option-backslash| about including spaces and backslashes. Environment variables are expanded |:set_env|. If the name of the shell contains a space, you might need to enclose it in quotes or escape the space. Example with quotes: > :set shell=\"c:\program\ files\unix\sh.exe\"\ -f < Note the backslash before each quote (to avoid starting a comment) and each space (to avoid ending the option value). Also note that the "-f" is not inside the quotes, because it is not part of the command name. Vim automagically recognizes the backslashes that are path separators. Example with escaped space (Vim will do this when initializing the option from $SHELL): > :set shell=/bin/with\\\ space/sh < The resulting value of 'shell' is "/bin/with\ space/sh", two backslashes are consumed by `:set`. Under MS-Windows, when the executable ends in ".com" it must be included. Thus setting the shell to "command.com" or "4dos.com" works, but "command" and "4dos" do not work for all commands (e.g., filtering). For unknown reasons, when using "4dos.com" the current directory is changed to "C:\". To avoid this set 'shell' like this: > :set shell=command.com\ /c\ 4dos < This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for security reasons. *'shellcmdflag'* *'shcf'* 'shellcmdflag' 'shcf' string (default: "-c"; MS-DOS and Win32, when 'shell' does not contain "sh" somewhere: "/c") global {not in Vi} Flag passed to the shell to execute "!" and ":!" commands; e.g., "bash.exe -c ls" or "command.com /c dir". For the MS-DOS-like systems, the default is set according to the value of 'shell', to reduce the need to set this option by the user. On Unix it can have more than one flag. Each white space separated part is passed as an argument to the shell command. See |option-backslash| about including spaces and backslashes. Also see |dos-shell| for MS-DOS and MS-Windows. This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for security reasons. *'shellpipe'* *'sp'* 'shellpipe' 'sp' string (default ">", "| tee", "|& tee" or "2>&1| tee") global {not in Vi} {not available when compiled without the |+quickfix| feature} String to be used to put the output of the ":make" command in the error file. See also |:make_makeprg|. See |option-backslash| about including spaces and backslashes. The name of the temporary file can be represented by "%s" if necessary (the file name is appended automatically if no %s appears in the value of this option). For the Amiga and MS-DOS the default is ">". The output is directly saved in a file and not echoed to the screen. For Unix the default it "| tee". The stdout of the compiler is saved in a file and echoed to the screen. If the 'shell' option is "csh" or "tcsh" after initializations, the default becomes "|& tee". If the 'shell' option is "sh", "ksh", "mksh", "pdksh", "zsh" or "bash" the default becomes "2>&1| tee". This means that stderr is also included. Before using the 'shell' option a path is removed, thus "/bin/sh" uses "sh". The initialization of this option is done after reading the ".vimrc" and the other initializations, so that when the 'shell' option is set there, the 'shellpipe' option changes automatically, unless it was explicitly set before. When 'shellpipe' is set to an empty string, no redirection of the ":make" output will be done. This is useful if you use a 'makeprg' that writes to 'makeef' by itself. If you want no piping, but do want to include the 'makeef', set 'shellpipe' to a single space. Don't forget to precede the space with a backslash: ":set sp=\ ". In the future pipes may be used for filtering and this option will become obsolete (at least for Unix). This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for security reasons. *'shellquote'* *'shq'* 'shellquote' 'shq' string (default: ""; MS-DOS and Win32, when 'shell' contains "sh" somewhere: "\"") global {not in Vi} Quoting character(s), put around the command passed to the shell, for the "!" and ":!" commands. The redirection is kept outside of the quoting. See 'shellxquote' to include the redirection. It's probably not useful to set both options. This is an empty string by default. Only known to be useful for third-party shells on MS-DOS-like systems, such as the MKS Korn Shell or bash, where it should be "\"". The default is adjusted according the value of 'shell', to reduce the need to set this option by the user. See |dos-shell|. This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for security reasons. *'shellredir'* *'srr'* 'shellredir' 'srr' string (default ">", ">&" or ">%s 2>&1") global {not in Vi} String to be used to put the output of a filter command in a temporary file. See also |:!|. See |option-backslash| about including spaces and backslashes. The name of the temporary file can be represented by "%s" if necessary (the file name is appended automatically if no %s appears in the value of this option). The default is ">". For Unix, if the 'shell' option is "csh", "tcsh" or "zsh" during initializations, the default becomes ">&". If the 'shell' option is "sh", "ksh" or "bash" the default becomes ">%s 2>&1". This means that stderr is also included. For Win32, the Unix checks are done and additionally "cmd" is checked for, which makes the default ">%s 2>&1". Also, the same names with ".exe" appended are checked for. The initialization of this option is done after reading the ".vimrc" and the other initializations, so that when the 'shell' option is set there, the 'shellredir' option changes automatically unless it was explicitly set before. In the future pipes may be used for filtering and this option will become obsolete (at least for Unix). This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for security reasons. *'shellslash'* *'ssl'* *'noshellslash'* *'nossl'* 'shellslash' 'ssl' boolean (default off) global {not in Vi} {only for MSDOS, MS-Windows and OS/2} When set, a forward slash is used when expanding file names. This is useful when a Unix-like shell is used instead of command.com or cmd.exe. Backward slashes can still be typed, but they are changed to forward slashes by Vim. Note that setting or resetting this option has no effect for some existing file names, thus this option needs to be set before opening any file for best results. This might change in the future. 'shellslash' only works when a backslash can be used as a path separator. To test if this is so use: > if exists('+shellslash') < *'shelltemp'* *'stmp'* *'noshelltemp'* *'nostmp'* 'shelltemp' 'stmp' boolean (Vi default off, Vim default on) global {not in Vi} When on, use temp files for shell commands. When off use a pipe. When using a pipe is not possible temp files are used anyway. Currently a pipe is only supported on Unix and MS-Windows 2K and later. You can check it with: > :if has("filterpipe") < The advantage of using a pipe is that nobody can read the temp file and the 'shell' command does not need to support redirection. The advantage of using a temp file is that the file type and encoding can be detected. The |FilterReadPre|, |FilterReadPost| and |FilterWritePre|, |FilterWritePost| autocommands event are not triggered when 'shelltemp' is off. The `system()` function does not respect this option and always uses temp files. NOTE: This option is set to the Vim default value when 'compatible' is reset. *'shelltype'* *'st'* 'shelltype' 'st' number (default 0) global {not in Vi} {only for the Amiga} On the Amiga this option influences the way how the commands work which use a shell. 0 and 1: always use the shell 2 and 3: use the shell only to filter lines 4 and 5: use shell only for ':sh' command When not using the shell, the command is executed directly. 0 and 2: use "shell 'shellcmdflag' cmd" to start external commands 1 and 3: use "shell cmd" to start external commands *'shellxescape'* *'sxe'* 'shellxescape' 'sxe' string (default: ""; for MS-DOS and MS-Windows: "\"&|<>()@^") global {not in Vi} When 'shellxquote' is set to "(" then the characters listed in this option will be escaped with a '^' character. This makes it possible to execute most external commands with cmd.exe. *'shellxquote'* *'sxq'* 'shellxquote' 'sxq' string (default: ""; for Win32, when 'shell' is cmd.exe: "(" for Win32, when 'shell' contains "sh" somewhere: "\"" for Unix, when using system(): "\"") global {not in Vi} Quoting character(s), put around the command passed to the shell, for the "!" and ":!" commands. Includes the redirection. See 'shellquote' to exclude the redirection. It's probably not useful to set both options. When the value is '(' then ')' is appended. When the value is '"(' then ')"' is appended. When the value is '(' then also see 'shellxescape'. This is an empty string by default on most systems, but is known to be useful for on Win32 version, either for cmd.exe which automatically strips off the first and last quote on a command, or 3rd-party shells such as the MKS Korn Shell or bash, where it should be "\"". The default is adjusted according the value of 'shell', to reduce the need to set this option by the user. See |dos-shell|. This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for security reasons. *'shiftround'* *'sr'* *'noshiftround'* *'nosr'* 'shiftround' 'sr' boolean (default off) global {not in Vi} Round indent to multiple of 'shiftwidth'. Applies to > and < commands. CTRL-T and CTRL-D in Insert mode always round the indent to a multiple of 'shiftwidth' (this is Vi compatible). NOTE: This option is reset when 'compatible' is set. *'shiftwidth'* *'sw'* 'shiftwidth' 'sw' number (default 8) local to buffer Number of spaces to use for each step of (auto)indent. Used for |'cindent'|, |>>|, |<<|, etc. When zero the 'ts' value will be used. Use the |shiftwidth()| function to get the effective shiftwidth value. *'shortmess'* *'shm'* 'shortmess' 'shm' string (Vim default "filnxtToO", Vi default: "", POSIX default: "A") global {not in Vi} This option helps to avoid all the |hit-enter| prompts caused by file messages, for example with CTRL-G, and to avoid some other messages. It is a list of flags: flag meaning when present ~ f use "(3 of 5)" instead of "(file 3 of 5)" i use "[noeol]" instead of "[Incomplete last line]" l use "999L, 888C" instead of "999 lines, 888 characters" m use "[+]" instead of "[Modified]" n use "[New]" instead of "[New File]" r use "[RO]" instead of "[readonly]" w use "[w]" instead of "written" for file write message and "[a]" instead of "appended" for ':w >> file' command x use "[dos]" instead of "[dos format]", "[unix]" instead of "[unix format]" and "[mac]" instead of "[mac format]". a all of the above abbreviations o overwrite message for writing a file with subsequent message for reading a file (useful for ":wn" or when 'autowrite' on) O message for reading a file overwrites any previous message. Also for quickfix message (e.g., ":cn"). s don't give "search hit BOTTOM, continuing at TOP" or "search hit TOP, continuing at BOTTOM" messages t truncate file message at the start if it is too long to fit on the command-line, "<" will appear in the left most column. Ignored in Ex mode. T truncate other messages in the middle if they are too long to fit on the command line. "..." will appear in the middle. Ignored in Ex mode. W don't give "written" or "[w]" when writing a file A don't give the "ATTENTION" message when an existing swap file is found. I don't give the intro message when starting Vim |:intro|. c don't give |ins-completion-menu| messages. For example, "-- XXX completion (YYY)", "match 1 of 2", "The only match", "Pattern not found", "Back at original", etc. q use "recording" instead of "recording @a" F don't give the file info when editing a file, like `:silent` was used for the command; note that this also affects messages from autocommands This gives you the opportunity to avoid that a change between buffers requires you to hit <Enter>, but still gives as useful a message as possible for the space available. To get the whole message that you would have got with 'shm' empty, use ":file!" Useful values: shm= No abbreviation of message. shm=a Abbreviation, but no loss of information. shm=at Abbreviation, and truncate message when necessary. NOTE: This option is set to the Vi default value when 'compatible' is set and to the Vim default value when 'compatible' is reset. *'shortname'* *'sn'* *'noshortname'* *'nosn'* 'shortname' 'sn' boolean (default off) local to buffer {not in Vi, not in MS-DOS versions} Filenames are assumed to be 8 characters plus one extension of 3 characters. Multiple dots in file names are not allowed. When this option is on, dots in file names are replaced with underscores when adding an extension (".~" or ".swp"). This option is not available for MS-DOS, because then it would always be on. This option is useful when editing files on an MS-DOS compatible filesystem, e.g., messydos or crossdos. When running the Win32 GUI version under Win32s, this option is always on by default. *'showbreak'* *'sbr'* *E595* 'showbreak' 'sbr' string (default "") global {not in Vi} {not available when compiled without the |+linebreak| feature} String to put at the start of lines that have been wrapped. Useful values are "> " or "+++ ": > :set showbreak=>\ < Note the backslash to escape the trailing space. It's easier like this: > :let &showbreak = '+++ ' < Only printable single-cell characters are allowed, excluding <Tab> and comma (in a future version the comma might be used to separate the part that is shown at the end and at the start of a line). The characters are highlighted according to the '@' flag in 'highlight'. Note that tabs after the showbreak will be displayed differently. If you want the 'showbreak' to appear in between line numbers, add the "n" flag to 'cpoptions'. *'showcmd'* *'sc'* *'noshowcmd'* *'nosc'* 'showcmd' 'sc' boolean (Vim default: on, off for Unix, Vi default: off, set in |defaults.vim|) global {not in Vi} {not available when compiled without the |+cmdline_info| feature} Show (partial) command in the last line of the screen. Set this option off if your terminal is slow. In Visual mode the size of the selected area is shown: - When selecting characters within a line, the number of characters. If the number of bytes is different it is also displayed: "2-6" means two characters and six bytes. - When selecting more than one line, the number of lines. - When selecting a block, the size in screen characters: {lines}x{columns}. NOTE: This option is set to the Vi default value when 'compatible' is set and to the Vim default value when 'compatible' is reset. *'showfulltag'* *'sft'* *'noshowfulltag'* *'nosft'* 'showfulltag' 'sft' boolean (default off) global {not in Vi} When completing a word in insert mode (see |ins-completion|) from the tags file, show both the tag name and a tidied-up form of the search pattern (if there is one) as possible matches. Thus, if you have matched a C function, you can see a template for what arguments are required (coding style permitting). Note that this doesn't work well together with having "longest" in 'completeopt', because the completion from the search pattern may not match the typed text. *'showmatch'* *'sm'* *'noshowmatch'* *'nosm'* 'showmatch' 'sm' boolean (default off) global When a bracket is inserted, briefly jump to the matching one. The jump is only done if the match can be seen on the screen. The time to show the match can be set with 'matchtime'. A Beep is given if there is no match (no matter if the match can be seen or not). This option is reset when 'paste' is set and restored when 'paste' is reset. When the 'm' flag is not included in 'cpoptions', typing a character will immediately move the cursor back to where it belongs. See the "sm" field in 'guicursor' for setting the cursor shape and blinking when showing the match. The 'matchpairs' option can be used to specify the characters to show matches for. 'rightleft' and 'revins' are used to look for opposite matches. Also see the matchparen plugin for highlighting the match when moving around |pi_paren.txt|. Note: Use of the short form is rated PG. *'showmode'* *'smd'* *'noshowmode'* *'nosmd'* 'showmode' 'smd' boolean (Vim default: on, Vi default: off) global If in Insert, Replace or Visual mode put a message on the last line. Use the 'M' flag in 'highlight' to set the type of highlighting for this message. When |XIM| may be used the message will include "XIM". But this doesn't mean XIM is really active, especially when 'imactivatekey' is not set. NOTE: This option is set to the Vi default value when 'compatible' is set and to the Vim default value when 'compatible' is reset. *'showtabline'* *'stal'* 'showtabline' 'stal' number (default 1) global {not in Vi} {not available when compiled without the |+windows| feature} The value of this option specifies when the line with tab page labels will be displayed: 0: never 1: only if there are at least two tab pages 2: always This is both for the GUI and non-GUI implementation of the tab pages line. See |tab-page| for more information about tab pages. *'sidescroll'* *'ss'* 'sidescroll' 'ss' number (default 0) global {not in Vi} The minimal number of columns to scroll horizontally. Used only when the 'wrap' option is off and the cursor is moved off of the screen. When it is zero the cursor will be put in the middle of the screen. When using a slow terminal set it to a large number or 0. When using a fast terminal use a small number or 1. Not used for "zh" and "zl" commands. *'sidescrolloff'* *'siso'* 'sidescrolloff' 'siso' number (default 0) global {not in Vi} The minimal number of screen columns to keep to the left and to the right of the cursor if 'nowrap' is set. Setting this option to a value greater than 0 while having |'sidescroll'| also at a non-zero value makes some context visible in the line you are scrolling in horizontally (except at beginning of the line). Setting this option to a large value (like 999) has the effect of keeping the cursor horizontally centered in the window, as long as one does not come too close to the beginning of the line. NOTE: This option is set to 0 when 'compatible' is set. Example: Try this together with 'sidescroll' and 'listchars' as in the following example to never allow the cursor to move onto the "extends" character: > :set nowrap sidescroll=1 listchars=extends:>,precedes:< :set sidescrolloff=1 < *'signcolumn'* *'scl'* 'signcolumn' 'scl' string (default "auto") local to window {not in Vi} {not available when compiled without the |+signs| feature} Whether or not to draw the signcolumn. Valid values are: "auto" only when there is a sign to display "no" never "yes" always *'smartcase'* *'scs'* *'nosmartcase'* *'noscs'* 'smartcase' 'scs' boolean (default off) global {not in Vi} Override the 'ignorecase' option if the search pattern contains upper case characters. Only used when the search pattern is typed and 'ignorecase' option is on. Used for the commands "/", "?", "n", "N", ":g" and ":s". Not used for "*", "#", "gd", tag search, etc. After "*" and "#" you can make 'smartcase' used by doing a "/" command, recalling the search pattern from history and hitting <Enter>. NOTE: This option is reset when 'compatible' is set. *'smartindent'* *'si'* *'nosmartindent'* *'nosi'* 'smartindent' 'si' boolean (default off) local to buffer {not in Vi} {not available when compiled without the |+smartindent| feature} Do smart autoindenting when starting a new line. Works for C-like programs, but can also be used for other languages. 'cindent' does something like this, works better in most cases, but is more strict, see |C-indenting|. When 'cindent' is on or 'indentexpr' is set, setting 'si' has no effect. 'indentexpr' is a more advanced alternative. Normally 'autoindent' should also be on when using 'smartindent'. An indent is automatically inserted: - After a line ending in '{'. - After a line starting with a keyword from 'cinwords'. - Before a line starting with '}' (only with the "O" command). When typing '}' as the first character in a new line, that line is given the same indent as the matching '{'. When typing '#' as the first character in a new line, the indent for that line is removed, the '#' is put in the first column. The indent is restored for the next line. If you don't want this, use this mapping: ":inoremap # X^H#", where ^H is entered with CTRL-V CTRL-H. When using the ">>" command, lines starting with '#' are not shifted right. NOTE: This option is reset when 'compatible' is set. This option is reset when 'paste' is set and restored when 'paste' is reset. *'smarttab'* *'sta'* *'nosmarttab'* *'nosta'* 'smarttab' 'sta' boolean (default off) global {not in Vi} When on, a <Tab> in front of a line inserts blanks according to 'shiftwidth'. 'tabstop' or 'softtabstop' is used in other places. A <BS> will delete a 'shiftwidth' worth of space at the start of the line. When off, a <Tab> always inserts blanks according to 'tabstop' or 'softtabstop'. 'shiftwidth' is only used for shifting text left or right |shift-left-right|. What gets inserted (a <Tab> or spaces) depends on the 'expandtab' option. Also see |ins-expandtab|. When 'expandtab' is not set, the number of spaces is minimized by using <Tab>s. This option is reset when 'paste' is set and restored when 'paste' is reset. NOTE: This option is reset when 'compatible' is set. *'softtabstop'* *'sts'* 'softtabstop' 'sts' number (default 0) local to buffer {not in Vi} Number of spaces that a <Tab> counts for while performing editing operations, like inserting a <Tab> or using <BS>. It "feels" like <Tab>s are being inserted, while in fact a mix of spaces and <Tab>s is used. This is useful to keep the 'ts' setting at its standard value of 8, while being able to edit like it is set to 'sts'. However, commands like "x" still work on the actual characters. When 'sts' is zero, this feature is off. When 'sts' is negative, the value of 'shiftwidth' is used. 'softtabstop' is set to 0 when the 'paste' option is set and restored when 'paste' is reset. See also |ins-expandtab|. When 'expandtab' is not set, the number of spaces is minimized by using <Tab>s. The 'L' flag in 'cpoptions' changes how tabs are used when 'list' is set. NOTE: This option is set to 0 when 'compatible' is set. *'spell'* *'nospell'* 'spell' boolean (default off) local to window {not in Vi} {not available when compiled without the |+syntax| feature} When on spell checking will be done. See |spell|. The languages are specified with 'spelllang'. *'spellcapcheck'* *'spc'* 'spellcapcheck' 'spc' string (default "[.?!]\_[\])'" \t]\+") local to buffer {not in Vi} {not available when compiled without the |+syntax| feature} Pattern to locate the end of a sentence. The following word will be checked to start with a capital letter. If not then it is highlighted with SpellCap |hl-SpellCap| (unless the word is also badly spelled). When this check is not wanted make this option empty. Only used when 'spell' is set. Be careful with special characters, see |option-backslash| about including spaces and backslashes. To set this option automatically depending on the language, see |set-spc-auto|. *'spellfile'* *'spf'* 'spellfile' 'spf' string (default empty) local to buffer {not in Vi} {not available when compiled without the |+syntax| feature} Name of the word list file where words are added for the |zg| and |zw| commands. It must end in ".{encoding}.add". You need to include the path, otherwise the file is placed in the current directory. *E765* It may also be a comma separated list of names. A count before the |zg| and |zw| commands can be used to access each. This allows using a personal word list file and a project word list file. When a word is added while this option is empty Vim will set it for you: Using the first directory in 'runtimepath' that is writable. If there is no "spell" directory yet it will be created. For the file name the first language name that appears in 'spelllang' is used, ignoring the region. The resulting ".spl" file will be used for spell checking, it does not have to appear in 'spelllang'. Normally one file is used for all regions, but you can add the region name if you want to. However, it will then only be used when 'spellfile' is set to it, for entries in 'spelllang' only files without region name will be found. This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for security reasons. *'spelllang'* *'spl'* 'spelllang' 'spl' string (default "en") local to buffer {not in Vi} {not available when compiled without the |+syntax| feature} A comma separated list of word list names. When the 'spell' option is on spellchecking will be done for these languages. Example: > set spelllang=en_us,nl,medical < This means US English, Dutch and medical words are recognized. Words that are not recognized will be highlighted. The word list name must not include a comma or dot. Using a dash is recommended to separate the two letter language name from a specification. Thus "en-rare" is used for rare English words. A region name must come last and have the form "_xx", where "xx" is the two-letter, lower case region name. You can use more than one region by listing them: "en_us,en_ca" supports both US and Canadian English, but not words specific for Australia, New Zealand or Great Britain. (Note: currently en_au and en_nz dictionaries are older than en_ca, en_gb and en_us). If the name "cjk" is included East Asian characters are excluded from spell checking. This is useful when editing text that also has Asian words. *E757* As a special case the name of a .spl file can be given as-is. The first "_xx" in the name is removed and used as the region name (_xx is an underscore, two letters and followed by a non-letter). This is mainly for testing purposes. You must make sure the correct encoding is used, Vim doesn't check it. When 'encoding' is set the word lists are reloaded. Thus it's a good idea to set 'spelllang' after setting 'encoding' to avoid loading the files twice. How the related spell files are found is explained here: |spell-load|. If the |spellfile.vim| plugin is active and you use a language name for which Vim cannot find the .spl file in 'runtimepath' the plugin will ask you if you want to download the file. After this option has been set successfully, Vim will source the files "spell/LANG.vim" in 'runtimepath'. "LANG" is the value of 'spelllang' up to the first comma, dot or underscore. Also see |set-spc-auto|. *'spellsuggest'* *'sps'* 'spellsuggest' 'sps' string (default "best") global {not in Vi} {not available when compiled without the |+syntax| feature} Methods used for spelling suggestions. Both for the |z=| command and the |spellsuggest()| function. This is a comma-separated list of items: best Internal method that works best for English. Finds changes like "fast" and uses a bit of sound-a-like scoring to improve the ordering. double Internal method that uses two methods and mixes the results. The first method is "fast", the other method computes how much the suggestion sounds like the bad word. That only works when the language specifies sound folding. Can be slow and doesn't always give better results. fast Internal method that only checks for simple changes: character inserts/deletes/swaps. Works well for simple typing mistakes. {number} The maximum number of suggestions listed for |z=|. Not used for |spellsuggest()|. The number of suggestions is never more than the value of 'lines' minus two. file:{filename} Read file {filename}, which must have two columns, separated by a slash. The first column contains the bad word, the second column the suggested good word. Example: theribal/terrible ~ Use this for common mistakes that do not appear at the top of the suggestion list with the internal methods. Lines without a slash are ignored, use this for comments. The word in the second column must be correct, otherwise it will not be used. Add the word to an ".add" file if it is currently flagged as a spelling mistake. The file is used for all languages. expr:{expr} Evaluate expression {expr}. Use a function to avoid trouble with spaces. |v:val| holds the badly spelled word. The expression must evaluate to a List of Lists, each with a suggestion and a score. Example: [['the', 33], ['that', 44]] ~ Set 'verbose' and use |z=| to see the scores that the internal methods use. A lower score is better. This may invoke |spellsuggest()| if you temporarily set 'spellsuggest' to exclude the "expr:" part. Errors are silently ignored, unless you set the 'verbose' option to a non-zero value. Only one of "best", "double" or "fast" may be used. The others may appear several times in any order. Example: > :set sps=file:~/.vim/sugg,best,expr:MySuggest() < This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for security reasons. *'splitbelow'* *'sb'* *'nosplitbelow'* *'nosb'* 'splitbelow' 'sb' boolean (default off) global {not in Vi} {not available when compiled without the |+windows| feature} When on, splitting a window will put the new window below the current one. |:split| *'splitright'* *'spr'* *'nosplitright'* *'nospr'* 'splitright' 'spr' boolean (default off) global {not in Vi} {not available when compiled without the |+vertsplit| feature} When on, splitting a window will put the new window right of the current one. |:vsplit| *'startofline'* *'sol'* *'nostartofline'* *'nosol'* 'startofline' 'sol' boolean (default on) global {not in Vi} When "on" the commands listed below move the cursor to the first non-blank of the line. When off the cursor is kept in the same column (if possible). This applies to the commands: CTRL-D, CTRL-U, CTRL-B, CTRL-F, "G", "H", "M", "L", gg, and to the commands "d", "<<" and ">>" with a linewise operator, with "%" with a count and to buffer changing commands (CTRL-^, :bnext, :bNext, etc.). Also for an Ex command that only has a line number, e.g., ":25" or ":+". In case of buffer changing commands the cursor is placed at the column where it was the last time the buffer was edited. NOTE: This option is set when 'compatible' is set. *'statusline'* *'stl'* *E540* *E542* 'statusline' 'stl' string (default empty) global or local to window |global-local| {not in Vi} {not available when compiled without the |+statusline| feature} When nonempty, this option determines the content of the status line. Also see |status-line|. The option consists of printf style '%' items interspersed with normal text. Each status line item is of the form: %-0{minwid}.{maxwid}{item} All fields except the {item} are optional. A single percent sign can be given as "%%". Up to 80 items can be specified. *E541* When the option starts with "%!" then it is used as an expression, evaluated and the result is used as the option value. Example: > :set statusline=%!MyStatusLine() < The result can contain %{} items that will be evaluated too. Note that the "%!" expression is evaluated in the context of the current window and buffer, while %{} items are evaluated in the context of the window that the statusline belongs to. When there is error while evaluating the option then it will be made empty to avoid further errors. Otherwise screen updating would loop. Note that the only effect of 'ruler' when this option is set (and 'laststatus' is 2) is controlling the output of |CTRL-G|. field meaning ~ - Left justify the item. The default is right justified when minwid is larger than the length of the item. 0 Leading zeroes in numeric items. Overridden by '-'. minwid Minimum width of the item, padding as set by '-' & '0'. Value must be 50 or less. maxwid Maximum width of the item. Truncation occurs with a '<' on the left for text items. Numeric items will be shifted down to maxwid-2 digits followed by '>'number where number is the amount of missing digits, much like an exponential notation. item A one letter code as described below. Following is a description of the possible statusline items. The second character in "item" is the type: N for number S for string F for flags as described below - not applicable item meaning ~ f S Path to the file in the buffer, as typed or relative to current directory. F S Full path to the file in the buffer. t S File name (tail) of file in the buffer. m F Modified flag, text is "[+]"; "[-]" if 'modifiable' is off. M F Modified flag, text is ",+" or ",-". r F Readonly flag, text is "[RO]". R F Readonly flag, text is ",RO". h F Help buffer flag, text is "[help]". H F Help buffer flag, text is ",HLP". w F Preview window flag, text is "[Preview]". W F Preview window flag, text is ",PRV". y F Type of file in the buffer, e.g., "[vim]". See 'filetype'. Y F Type of file in the buffer, e.g., ",VIM". See 'filetype'. q S "[Quickfix List]", "[Location List]" or empty. k S Value of "b:keymap_name" or 'keymap' when |:lmap| mappings are being used: "<keymap>" n N Buffer number. b N Value of character under cursor. B N As above, in hexadecimal. o N Byte number in file of byte under cursor, first byte is 1. Mnemonic: Offset from start of file (with one added) {not available when compiled without |+byte_offset| feature} O N As above, in hexadecimal. N N Printer page number. (Only works in the 'printheader' option.) l N Line number. L N Number of lines in buffer. c N Column number. v N Virtual column number. V N Virtual column number as -{num}. Not displayed if equal to 'c'. p N Percentage through file in lines as in |CTRL-G|. P S Percentage through file of displayed window. This is like the percentage described for 'ruler'. Always 3 in length, unless translated. a S Argument list status as in default title. ({current} of {max}) Empty if the argument file count is zero or one. { NF Evaluate expression between '%{' and '}' and substitute result. Note that there is no '%' before the closing '}'. The expression cannot contain a '}' character, call a function to work around that. ( - Start of item group. Can be used for setting the width and alignment of a section. Must be followed by %) somewhere. ) - End of item group. No width fields allowed. T N For 'tabline': start of tab page N label. Use %T after the last label. This information is used for mouse clicks. X N For 'tabline': start of close tab N label. Use %X after the label, e.g.: %3Xclose%X. Use %999X for a "close current tab" mark. This information is used for mouse clicks. < - Where to truncate line if too long. Default is at the start. No width fields allowed. = - Separation point between left and right aligned items. No width fields allowed. # - Set highlight group. The name must follow and then a # again. Thus use %#HLname# for highlight group HLname. The same highlighting is used, also for the statusline of non-current windows. * - Set highlight group to User{N}, where {N} is taken from the minwid field, e.g. %1*. Restore normal highlight with %* or %0*. The difference between User{N} and StatusLine will be applied to StatusLineNC for the statusline of non-current windows. The number N must be between 1 and 9. See |hl-User1..9| When displaying a flag, Vim removes the leading comma, if any, when that flag comes right after plaintext. This will make a nice display when flags are used like in the examples below. When all items in a group becomes an empty string (i.e. flags that are not set) and a minwid is not set for the group, the whole group will become empty. This will make a group like the following disappear completely from the statusline when none of the flags are set. > :set statusline=...%(\ [%M%R%H]%)... < *g:actual_curbuf* Beware that an expression is evaluated each and every time the status line is displayed. The current buffer and current window will be set temporarily to that of the window (and buffer) whose statusline is currently being drawn. The expression will evaluate in this context. The variable "actual_curbuf" is set to the 'bufnr()' number of the real current buffer. The 'statusline' option will be evaluated in the |sandbox| if set from a modeline, see |sandbox-option|. This option cannot be set in a modeline when 'modelineexpr' is off. It is not allowed to change text or jump to another window while evaluating 'statusline' |textlock|. If the statusline is not updated when you want it (e.g., after setting a variable that's used in an expression), you can force an update by setting an option without changing its value. Example: > :let &ro = &ro < A result of all digits is regarded a number for display purposes. Otherwise the result is taken as flag text and applied to the rules described above. Watch out for errors in expressions. They may render Vim unusable! If you are stuck, hold down ':' or 'Q' to get a prompt, then quit and edit your .vimrc or whatever with "vim --clean" to get it right. Examples: Emulate standard status line with 'ruler' set > :set statusline=%<%f\ %h%m%r%=%-14.(%l,%c%V%)\ %P < Similar, but add ASCII value of char under the cursor (like "ga") > :set statusline=%<%f%h%m%r%=%b\ 0x%B\ \ %l,%c%V\ %P < Display byte count and byte value, modified flag in red. > :set statusline=%<%f%=\ [%1*%M%*%n%R%H]\ %-19(%3l,%02c%03V%)%O'%02b' :hi User1 term=inverse,bold cterm=inverse,bold ctermfg=red < Display a ,GZ flag if a compressed file is loaded > :set statusline=...%r%{VarExists('b:gzflag','\ [GZ]')}%h... < In the |:autocmd|'s: > :let b:gzflag = 1 < And: > :unlet b:gzflag < And define this function: > :function VarExists(var, val) : if exists(a:var) | return a:val | else | return '' | endif :endfunction < *'suffixes'* *'su'* 'suffixes' 'su' string (default ".bak,~,.o,.h,.info,.swp,.obj") global {not in Vi} Files with these suffixes get a lower priority when multiple files match a wildcard. See |suffixes|. Commas can be used to separate the suffixes. Spaces after the comma are ignored. A dot is also seen as the start of a suffix. To avoid a dot or comma being recognized as a separator, precede it with a backslash (see |option-backslash| about including spaces and backslashes). See 'wildignore' for completely ignoring files. The use of |:set+=| and |:set-=| is preferred when adding or removing suffixes from the list. This avoids problems when a future version uses another default. *'suffixesadd'* *'sua'* 'suffixesadd' 'sua' string (default "") local to buffer {not in Vi} {not available when compiled without the |+file_in_path| feature} Comma separated list of suffixes, which are used when searching for a file for the "gf", "[I", etc. commands. Example: > :set suffixesadd=.java < *'swapfile'* *'swf'* *'noswapfile'* *'noswf'* 'swapfile' 'swf' boolean (default on) local to buffer {not in Vi} Use a swapfile for the buffer. This option can be reset when a swapfile is not wanted for a specific buffer. For example, with confidential information that even root must not be able to access. Careful: All text will be in memory: - Don't use this for big files. - Recovery will be impossible! A swapfile will only be present when |'updatecount'| is non-zero and 'swapfile' is set. When 'swapfile' is reset, the swap file for the current buffer is immediately deleted. When 'swapfile' is set, and 'updatecount' is non-zero, a swap file is immediately created. Also see |swap-file| and |'swapsync'|. If you want to open a new buffer without creating a swap file for it, use the |:noswapfile| modifier. See 'directory' for where the swap file is created. This option is used together with 'bufhidden' and 'buftype' to specify special kinds of buffers. See |special-buffers|. *'swapsync'* *'sws'* 'swapsync' 'sws' string (default "fsync") global {not in Vi} When this option is not empty a swap file is synced to disk after writing to it. This takes some time, especially on busy unix systems. When this option is empty parts of the swap file may be in memory and not written to disk. When the system crashes you may lose more work. On Unix the system does a sync now and then without Vim asking for it, so the disadvantage of setting this option off is small. On some systems the swap file will not be written at all. For a unix system setting it to "sync" will use the sync() call instead of the default fsync(), which may work better on some systems. The 'fsync' option is used for the actual file. *'switchbuf'* *'swb'* 'switchbuf' 'swb' string (default "") global {not in Vi} This option controls the behavior when switching between buffers. Possible values (comma separated list): useopen If included, jump to the first open window that contains the specified buffer (if there is one). Otherwise: Do not examine other windows. This setting is checked with |quickfix| commands, when jumping to errors (":cc", ":cn", "cp", etc.). It is also used in all buffer related split commands, for example ":sbuffer", ":sbnext", or ":sbrewind". usetab Like "useopen", but also consider windows in other tab pages. split If included, split the current window before loading a buffer for a |quickfix| command that display errors. Otherwise: do not split, use current window. vsplit Just like "split" but split vertically. newtab Like "split", but open a new tab page. Overrules "split" when both are present. *'synmaxcol'* *'smc'* 'synmaxcol' 'smc' number (default 3000) local to buffer {not in Vi} {not available when compiled without the |+syntax| feature} Maximum column in which to search for syntax items. In long lines the text after this column is not highlighted and following lines may not be highlighted correctly, because the syntax state is cleared. This helps to avoid very slow redrawing for an XML file that is one long line. Set to zero to remove the limit. *'syntax'* *'syn'* 'syntax' 'syn' string (default empty) local to buffer {not in Vi} {not available when compiled without the |+syntax| feature} When this option is set, the syntax with this name is loaded, unless syntax highlighting has been switched off with ":syntax off". Otherwise this option does not always reflect the current syntax (the b:current_syntax variable does). This option is most useful in a modeline, for a file which syntax is not automatically recognized. Example, in an IDL file: /* vim: set syntax=idl : */ ~ When a dot appears in the value then this separates two filetype names. Example: /* vim: set syntax=c.doxygen : */ ~ This will use the "c" syntax first, then the "doxygen" syntax. Note that the second one must be prepared to be loaded as an addition, otherwise it will be skipped. More than one dot may appear. To switch off syntax highlighting for the current file, use: > :set syntax=OFF < To switch syntax highlighting on according to the current value of the 'filetype' option: > :set syntax=ON < What actually happens when setting the 'syntax' option is that the Syntax autocommand event is triggered with the value as argument. This option is not copied to another buffer, independent of the 's' or 'S' flag in 'cpoptions'. Only normal file name characters can be used, "/\*?[|<>" are illegal. *'tabline'* *'tal'* 'tabline' 'tal' string (default empty) global {not in Vi} {not available when compiled without the |+windows| feature} When nonempty, this option determines the content of the tab pages line at the top of the Vim window. When empty Vim will use a default tab pages line. See |setting-tabline| for more info. The tab pages line only appears as specified with the 'showtabline' option and only when there is no GUI tab line. When 'e' is in 'guioptions' and the GUI supports a tab line 'guitablabel' is used instead. Note that the two tab pages lines are very different. The value is evaluated like with 'statusline'. You can use |tabpagenr()|, |tabpagewinnr()| and |tabpagebuflist()| to figure out the text to be displayed. Use "%1T" for the first label, "%2T" for the second one, etc. Use "%X" items for closing labels. This option cannot be set in a modeline when 'modelineexpr' is off. Keep in mind that only one of the tab pages is the current one, others are invisible and you can't jump to their windows. *'tabpagemax'* *'tpm'* 'tabpagemax' 'tpm' number (default 10) global {not in Vi} {not available when compiled without the |+windows| feature} Maximum number of tab pages to be opened by the |-p| command line argument or the ":tab all" command. |tabpage| *'tabstop'* *'ts'* 'tabstop' 'ts' number (default 8) local to buffer Number of spaces that a <Tab> in the file counts for. Also see |:retab| command, and 'softtabstop' option. Note: Setting 'tabstop' to any other value than 8 can make your file appear wrong in many places (e.g., when printing it). There are four main ways to use tabs in Vim: 1. Always keep 'tabstop' at 8, set 'softtabstop' and 'shiftwidth' to 4 (or 3 or whatever you prefer) and use 'noexpandtab'. Then Vim will use a mix of tabs and spaces, but typing <Tab> and <BS> will behave like a tab appears every 4 (or 3) characters. 2. Set 'tabstop' and 'shiftwidth' to whatever you prefer and use 'expandtab'. This way you will always insert spaces. The formatting will never be messed up when 'tabstop' is changed. 3. Set 'tabstop' and 'shiftwidth' to whatever you prefer and use a |modeline| to set these values when editing the file again. Only works when using Vim to edit the file. 4. Always set 'tabstop' and 'shiftwidth' to the same value, and 'noexpandtab'. This should then work (for initial indents only) for any tabstop setting that people use. It might be nice to have tabs after the first non-blank inserted as spaces if you do this though. Otherwise aligned comments will be wrong when 'tabstop' is changed. *'tagbsearch'* *'tbs'* *'notagbsearch'* *'notbs'* 'tagbsearch' 'tbs' boolean (default on) global {not in Vi} When searching for a tag (e.g., for the |:ta| command), Vim can either use a binary search or a linear search in a tags file. Binary searching makes searching for a tag a LOT faster, but a linear search will find more tags if the tags file wasn't properly sorted. Vim normally assumes that your tags files are sorted, or indicate that they are not sorted. Only when this is not the case does the 'tagbsearch' option need to be switched off. When 'tagbsearch' is on, binary searching is first used in the tags files. In certain situations, Vim will do a linear search instead for certain files, or retry all files with a linear search. When 'tagbsearch' is off, only a linear search is done. Linear searching is done anyway, for one file, when Vim finds a line at the start of the file indicating that it's not sorted: > !_TAG_FILE_SORTED 0 /some comment/ < [The whitespace before and after the '0' must be a single <Tab>] When a binary search was done and no match was found in any of the files listed in 'tags', and case is ignored or a pattern is used instead of a normal tag name, a retry is done with a linear search. Tags in unsorted tags files, and matches with different case will only be found in the retry. If a tag file indicates that it is case-fold sorted, the second, linear search can be avoided when case is ignored. Use a value of '2' in the "!_TAG_FILE_SORTED" line for this. A tag file can be case-fold sorted with the -f switch to "sort" in most unices, as in the command: "sort -f -o tags tags". For "Exuberant ctags" version 5.x or higher (at least 5.5) the --sort=foldcase switch can be used for this as well. Note that case must be folded to uppercase for this to work. By default, tag searches are case-sensitive. Case is ignored when 'ignorecase' is set and 'tagcase' is "followic", or when 'tagcase' is "ignore". Also when 'tagcase' is "followscs" and 'smartcase' is set, or 'tagcase' is "smart", and the pattern contains only lowercase characters. When 'tagbsearch' is off, tags searching is slower when a full match exists, but faster when no full match exists. Tags in unsorted tags files may only be found with 'tagbsearch' off. When the tags file is not sorted, or sorted in a wrong way (not on ASCII byte value), 'tagbsearch' should be off, or the line given above must be included in the tags file. This option doesn't affect commands that find all matching tags (e.g., command-line completion and ":help"). {Vi: always uses binary search in some versions} *'tagcase'* *'tc'* 'tagcase' 'tc' string (default "followic") global or local to buffer |global-local| {not in Vi} This option specifies how case is handled when searching the tags file: followic Follow the 'ignorecase' option followscs Follow the 'smartcase' and 'ignorecase' options ignore Ignore case match Match case smart Ignore case unless an upper case letter is used NOTE: This option is set to the Vi default value when 'compatible' is set and to the Vim default value when 'compatible' is reset. *'taglength'* *'tl'* 'taglength' 'tl' number (default 0) global If non-zero, tags are significant up to this number of characters. *'tagrelative'* *'tr'* *'notagrelative'* *'notr'* 'tagrelative' 'tr' boolean (Vim default: on, Vi default: off) global {not in Vi} If on and using a tags file in another directory, file names in that tags file are relative to the directory where the tags file is. NOTE: This option is set to the Vi default value when 'compatible' is set and to the Vim default value when 'compatible' is reset. *'tags'* *'tag'* *E433* 'tags' 'tag' string (default "./tags,tags", when compiled with |+emacs_tags|: "./tags,./TAGS,tags,TAGS") global or local to buffer |global-local| Filenames for the tag command, separated by spaces or commas. To include a space or comma in a file name, precede it with a backslash (see |option-backslash| about including spaces and backslashes). When a file name starts with "./", the '.' is replaced with the path of the current file. But only when the 'd' flag is not included in 'cpoptions'. Environment variables are expanded |:set_env|. Also see |tags-option|. "*", "**" and other wildcards can be used to search for tags files in a directory tree. See |file-searching|. E.g., "/lib/**/tags" will find all files named "tags" below "/lib". The filename itself cannot contain wildcards, it is used as-is. E.g., "/lib/**/tags?" will find files called "tags?". {not available when compiled without the |+path_extra| feature} The |tagfiles()| function can be used to get a list of the file names actually used. If Vim was compiled with the |+emacs_tags| feature, Emacs-style tag files are also supported. They are automatically recognized. The default value becomes "./tags,./TAGS,tags,TAGS", unless case differences are ignored (MS-Windows). |emacs-tags| The use of |:set+=| and |:set-=| is preferred when adding or removing file names from the list. This avoids problems when a future version uses another default. {Vi: default is "tags /usr/lib/tags"} *'tagstack'* *'tgst'* *'notagstack'* *'notgst'* 'tagstack' 'tgst' boolean (default on) global {not in all versions of Vi} When on, the |tagstack| is used normally. When off, a ":tag" or ":tselect" command with an argument will not push the tag onto the tagstack. A following ":tag" without an argument, a ":pop" command or any other command that uses the tagstack will use the unmodified tagstack, but does change the pointer to the active entry. Resetting this option is useful when using a ":tag" command in a mapping which should not change the tagstack. *'tcldll'* 'tcldll' string (default depends on the build) global {not in Vi} {only available when compiled with the |+tcl/dyn| feature} Specifies the name of the Tcl shared library. The default is DYNAMIC_TCL_DLL, which was specified at compile time. Environment variables are expanded |:set_env|. This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for security reasons. *'term'* *E529* *E530* *E531* 'term' string (default is $TERM, if that fails: in the GUI: "builtin_gui" on Amiga: "amiga" on BeOS: "beos-ansi" on Mac: "mac-ansi" on MiNT: "vt52" on MS-DOS: "pcterm" on OS/2: "os2ansi" on Unix: "ansi" on VMS: "ansi" on Win 32: "win32") global Name of the terminal. Used for choosing the terminal control characters. Environment variables are expanded |:set_env|. For example: > :set term=$TERM < See |termcap|. *'termbidi'* *'tbidi'* *'notermbidi'* *'notbidi'* 'termbidi' 'tbidi' boolean (default off, on for "mlterm") global {not in Vi} {only available when compiled with the |+arabic| feature} The terminal is in charge of Bi-directionality of text (as specified by Unicode). The terminal is also expected to do the required shaping that some languages (such as Arabic) require. Setting this option implies that 'rightleft' will not be set when 'arabic' is set and the value of 'arabicshape' will be ignored. Note that setting 'termbidi' has the immediate effect that 'arabicshape' is ignored, but 'rightleft' isn't changed automatically. This option is reset when the GUI is started. For further details see |arabic.txt|. *'termencoding'* *'tenc'* 'termencoding' 'tenc' string (default ""; with GTK+ GUI: "utf-8"; with Macintosh GUI: "macroman") global {only available when compiled with the |+multi_byte| feature} {not in Vi} Encoding used for the terminal. This specifies what character encoding the keyboard produces and the display will understand. For the GUI it only applies to the keyboard ('encoding' is used for the display). Except for the Mac when 'macatsui' is off, then 'termencoding' should be "macroman". *E617* Note: This does not apply to the GTK+ GUI. After the GUI has been successfully initialized, 'termencoding' is forcibly set to "utf-8". Any attempts to set a different value will be rejected, and an error message is shown. For the Win32 GUI and console versions 'termencoding' is not used, because the Win32 system always passes Unicode characters. When empty, the same encoding is used as for the 'encoding' option. This is the normal value. Not all combinations for 'termencoding' and 'encoding' are valid. See |encoding-table|. The value for this option must be supported by internal conversions or iconv(). When this is not possible no conversion will be done and you will probably experience problems with non-ASCII characters. Example: You are working with the locale set to euc-jp (Japanese) and want to edit a UTF-8 file: > :let &termencoding = &encoding :set encoding=utf-8 < You need to do this when your system has no locale support for UTF-8. *'termguicolors'* *'tgc'* *E954* 'termguicolors' 'tgc' boolean (default off) global {not in Vi} {not available when compiled without the |+termguicolors| feature} When on, uses |highlight-guifg| and |highlight-guibg| attributes in the terminal (thus using 24-bit color). Requires a ISO-8613-3 compatible terminal. If setting this option does not work (produces a colorless UI) reading |xterm-true-color| might help. For Win32 console, Windows 10 version 1703 (Creators Update) or later is required. Use this check to find out: > if has('vcon') < This requires Vim to be built with the |+vtp| feature. Note that the "cterm" attributes are still used, not the "gui" ones. NOTE: This option is reset when 'compatible' is set. *'termwinscroll'* *'twsl'* 'termwinscroll' 'twsl' number (default 10000) local to buffer {not in Vi} {not available when compiled without the |+terminal| feature} Number of scrollback lines to keep. When going over this limit the first 10% of the scrollback lines are deleted. This is just to reduce the memory usage. See |Terminal-Normal|. *'termwinkey'* *'twk'* 'termwinkey' 'twk' string (default "") local to window {not in Vi} The key that starts a CTRL-W command in a terminal window. Other keys are sent to the job running in the window. The <> notation can be used, e.g.: > :set termwinkey=<C-L> < The string must be one key stroke but can be multiple bytes. When not set CTRL-W is used, so that CTRL-W : gets you to the command line. If 'termwinkey' is set to CTRL-L then CTRL-L : gets you to the command line. *'termwinsize'* *'tws'* 'termwinsize' 'tws' string (default "") local to window {not in Vi} Size of the |terminal| window. Format: {rows}x{columns} or {rows}*{columns}. - When empty the terminal gets the size from the window. - When set with a "x" (e.g., "24x80") the terminal size is not adjusted to the window size. If the window is smaller only the top-left part is displayed. - When set with a "*" (e.g., "10*50") the terminal size follows the window size, but will not be smaller than the specified rows and/or columns. - When rows is zero then use the height of the window. - When columns is zero then use the width of the window. - Using "0x0" or "0*0" is the same as empty. Examples: "30x0" uses 30 rows and the current window width. "20*0" uses at least 20 rows and the current window width. "0*40" uses the current window height and at least 40 columns. Note that the command running in the terminal window may still change the size of the terminal. In that case the Vim window will be adjusted to that size, if possible. *'terse'* *'noterse'* 'terse' boolean (default off) global When set: Add 's' flag to 'shortmess' option (this makes the message for a search that hits the start or end of the file not being displayed). When reset: Remove 's' flag from 'shortmess' option. {Vi shortens a lot of messages} *'textauto'* *'ta'* *'notextauto'* *'nota'* 'textauto' 'ta' boolean (Vim default: on, Vi default: off) global {not in Vi} This option is obsolete. Use 'fileformats'. For backwards compatibility, when 'textauto' is set, 'fileformats' is set to the default value for the current system. When 'textauto' is reset, 'fileformats' is made empty. NOTE: This option is set to the Vi default value when 'compatible' is set and to the Vim default value when 'compatible' is reset. *'textmode'* *'tx'* *'notextmode'* *'notx'* 'textmode' 'tx' boolean (MS-DOS, Win32 and OS/2: default on, others: default off) local to buffer {not in Vi} This option is obsolete. Use 'fileformat'. For backwards compatibility, when 'textmode' is set, 'fileformat' is set to "dos". When 'textmode' is reset, 'fileformat' is set to "unix". *'textwidth'* *'tw'* 'textwidth' 'tw' number (default 0) local to buffer {not in Vi} Maximum width of text that is being inserted. A longer line will be broken after white space to get this width. A zero value disables this. 'textwidth' is set to 0 when the 'paste' option is set and restored when 'paste' is reset. When 'textwidth' is zero, 'wrapmargin' may be used. See also 'formatoptions' and |ins-textwidth|. When 'formatexpr' is set it will be used to break the line. NOTE: This option is set to 0 when 'compatible' is set. *'thesaurus'* *'tsr'* 'thesaurus' 'tsr' string (default "") global or local to buffer |global-local| {not in Vi} List of file names, separated by commas, that are used to lookup words for thesaurus completion commands |i_CTRL-X_CTRL-T|. Each line in the file should contain words with similar meaning, separated by non-keyword characters (white space is preferred). Maximum line length is 510 bytes. To obtain a file to be used here, check out this ftp site: [Sorry this link doesn't work anymore, do you know the right one?] ftp://ftp.ox.ac.uk/pub/wordlists/ First get the README file. To include a comma in a file name precede it with a backslash. Spaces after a comma are ignored, otherwise spaces are included in the file name. See |option-backslash| about using backslashes. The use of |:set+=| and |:set-=| is preferred when adding or removing directories from the list. This avoids problems when a future version uses another default. Backticks cannot be used in this option for security reasons. *'tildeop'* *'top'* *'notildeop'* *'notop'* 'tildeop' 'top' boolean (default off) global {not in Vi} When on: The tilde command "~" behaves like an operator. NOTE: This option is reset when 'compatible' is set. *'timeout'* *'to'* *'notimeout'* *'noto'* 'timeout' 'to' boolean (default on) global *'ttimeout'* *'nottimeout'* 'ttimeout' boolean (default off, set in |defaults.vim|) global {not in Vi} These two options together determine the behavior when part of a mapped key sequence or keyboard code has been received: 'timeout' 'ttimeout' action ~ off off do not time out on on or off time out on :mappings and key codes off on time out on key codes If both options are off, Vim will wait until either the complete mapping or key sequence has been received, or it is clear that there is no mapping or key sequence for the received characters. For example: if you have mapped "vl" and Vim has received 'v', the next character is needed to see if the 'v' is followed by an 'l'. When one of the options is on, Vim will wait for about 1 second for the next character to arrive. After that the already received characters are interpreted as single characters. The waiting time can be changed with the 'timeoutlen' option. On slow terminals or very busy systems timing out may cause malfunctioning cursor keys. If both options are off, Vim waits forever after an entered <Esc> if there are key codes that start with <Esc>. You will have to type <Esc> twice. If you do not have problems with key codes, but would like to have :mapped key sequences not timing out in 1 second, set the 'ttimeout' option and reset the 'timeout' option. NOTE: 'ttimeout' is reset when 'compatible' is set. *'timeoutlen'* *'tm'* 'timeoutlen' 'tm' number (default 1000) global {not in all versions of Vi} *'ttimeoutlen'* *'ttm'* 'ttimeoutlen' 'ttm' number (default -1, set to 100 in |defaults.vim|) global {not in Vi} The time in milliseconds that is waited for a key code or mapped key sequence to complete. Also used for CTRL-\ CTRL-N and CTRL-\ CTRL-G when part of a command has been typed. Normally only 'timeoutlen' is used and 'ttimeoutlen' is -1. When a different timeout value for key codes is desired set 'ttimeoutlen' to a non-negative number. ttimeoutlen mapping delay key code delay ~ < 0 'timeoutlen' 'timeoutlen' >= 0 'timeoutlen' 'ttimeoutlen' The timeout only happens when the 'timeout' and 'ttimeout' options tell so. A useful setting would be > :set timeout timeoutlen=3000 ttimeoutlen=100 < (time out on mapping after three seconds, time out on key codes after a tenth of a second). *'title'* *'notitle'* 'title' boolean (default off, on when title can be restored) global {not in Vi} {not available when compiled without the |+title| feature} When on, the title of the window will be set to the value of 'titlestring' (if it is not empty), or to: filename [+=-] (path) - VIM Where: filename the name of the file being edited - indicates the file cannot be modified, 'ma' off + indicates the file was modified = indicates the file is read-only =+ indicates the file is read-only and modified (path) is the path of the file being edited - VIM the server name |v:servername| or "VIM" Only works if the terminal supports setting window titles (currently Amiga console, Win32 console, all GUI versions and terminals with a non- empty 't_ts' option - these are Unix xterm and iris-ansi by default, where 't_ts' is taken from the builtin termcap). *X11* When Vim was compiled with HAVE_X11 defined, the original title will be restored if possible. The output of ":version" will include "+X11" when HAVE_X11 was defined, otherwise it will be "-X11". This also works for the icon name |'icon'|. But: When Vim was started with the |-X| argument, restoring the title will not work (except in the GUI). If the title cannot be restored, it is set to the value of 'titleold'. You might want to restore the title outside of Vim then. When using an xterm from a remote machine you can use this command: rsh machine_name xterm -display $DISPLAY & then the WINDOWID environment variable should be inherited and the title of the window should change back to what it should be after exiting Vim. *'titlelen'* 'titlelen' number (default 85) global {not in Vi} {not available when compiled without the |+title| feature} Gives the percentage of 'columns' to use for the length of the window title. When the title is longer, only the end of the path name is shown. A '<' character before the path name is used to indicate this. Using a percentage makes this adapt to the width of the window. But it won't work perfectly, because the actual number of characters available also depends on the font used and other things in the title bar. When 'titlelen' is zero the full path is used. Otherwise, values from 1 to 30000 percent can be used. 'titlelen' is also used for the 'titlestring' option. *'titleold'* 'titleold' string (default "Thanks for flying Vim") global {not in Vi} {only available when compiled with the |+title| feature} This option will be used for the window title when exiting Vim if the original title cannot be restored. Only happens if 'title' is on or 'titlestring' is not empty. This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for security reasons. *'titlestring'* 'titlestring' string (default "") global {not in Vi} {not available when compiled without the |+title| feature} When this option is not empty, it will be used for the title of the window. This happens only when the 'title' option is on. Only works if the terminal supports setting window titles (currently Amiga console, Win32 console, all GUI versions and terminals with a non-empty 't_ts' option). When Vim was compiled with HAVE_X11 defined, the original title will be restored if possible, see |X11|. When this option contains printf-style '%' items, they will be expanded according to the rules used for 'statusline'. This option cannot be set in a modeline when 'modelineexpr' is off. Example: > :auto BufEnter * let &titlestring = hostname() . "/" . expand("%:p") :set title titlestring=%<%F%=%l/%L-%P titlelen=70 < The value of 'titlelen' is used to align items in the middle or right of the available space. Some people prefer to have the file name first: > :set titlestring=%t%(\ %M%)%(\ (%{expand(\"%:~:.:h\")})%)%(\ %a%) < Note the use of "%{ }" and an expression to get the path of the file, without the file name. The "%( %)" constructs are used to add a separating space only when needed. NOTE: Use of special characters in 'titlestring' may cause the display to be garbled (e.g., when it contains a CR or NL character). {not available when compiled without the |+statusline| feature} *'toolbar'* *'tb'* 'toolbar' 'tb' string (default "icons,tooltips") global {only for |+GUI_GTK|, |+GUI_Athena|, |+GUI_Motif| and |+GUI_Photon|} The contents of this option controls various toolbar settings. The possible values are: icons Toolbar buttons are shown with icons. text Toolbar buttons shown with text. horiz Icon and text of a toolbar button are horizontally arranged. {only in GTK+ 2 GUI} tooltips Tooltips are active for toolbar buttons. Tooltips refer to the popup help text which appears after the mouse cursor is placed over a toolbar button for a brief moment. If you want the toolbar to be shown with icons as well as text, do the following: > :set tb=icons,text < Motif and Athena cannot display icons and text at the same time. They will show icons if both are requested. If none of the strings specified in 'toolbar' are valid or if 'toolbar' is empty, this option is ignored. If you want to disable the toolbar, you need to set the 'guioptions' option. For example: > :set guioptions-=T < Also see |gui-toolbar|. *'toolbariconsize'* *'tbis'* 'toolbariconsize' 'tbis' string (default "small") global {not in Vi} {only in the GTK+ GUI} Controls the size of toolbar icons. The possible values are: tiny Use tiny icons. small Use small icons (default). medium Use medium-sized icons. large Use large icons. huge Use even larger icons. giant Use very big icons. The exact dimensions in pixels of the various icon sizes depend on the current theme. Common dimensions are giant=48x48, huge=32x32, large=24x24, medium=24x24, small=20x20 and tiny=16x16. If 'toolbariconsize' is empty, the global default size as determined by user preferences or the current theme is used. *'ttybuiltin'* *'tbi'* *'nottybuiltin'* *'notbi'* 'ttybuiltin' 'tbi' boolean (default on) global {not in Vi} When on, the builtin termcaps are searched before the external ones. When off the builtin termcaps are searched after the external ones. When this option is changed, you should set the 'term' option next for the change to take effect, for example: > :set notbi term=$TERM < See also |termcap|. Rationale: The default for this option is "on", because the builtin termcap entries are generally better (many systems contain faulty xterm entries...). *'ttyfast'* *'tf'* *'nottyfast'* *'notf'* 'ttyfast' 'tf' boolean (default off, on when 'term' is xterm, hpterm, sun-cmd, screen, rxvt, dtterm or iris-ansi; also on when running Vim in a DOS console) global {not in Vi} Indicates a fast terminal connection. More characters will be sent to the screen for redrawing, instead of using insert/delete line commands. Improves smoothness of redrawing when there are multiple windows and the terminal does not support a scrolling region. Also enables the extra writing of characters at the end of each screen line for lines that wrap. This helps when using copy/paste with the mouse in an xterm and other terminals. *'ttymouse'* *'ttym'* 'ttymouse' 'ttym' string (default depends on 'term') global {not in Vi} {only in Unix and VMS, doesn't work in the GUI; not available when compiled without |+mouse|} Name of the terminal type for which mouse codes are to be recognized. Currently these strings are valid: *xterm-mouse* xterm xterm-like mouse handling. The mouse generates "<Esc>[Mscr", where "scr" is three bytes: "s" = button state "c" = column plus 33 "r" = row plus 33 This only works up to 223 columns! See "dec", "urxvt", and "sgr" for solutions. xterm2 Works like "xterm", but with the xterm reporting the mouse position while the mouse is dragged. This works much faster and more precise. Your xterm must at least at patchlevel 88 / XFree 3.3.3 for this to work. See below for how Vim detects this automatically. *netterm-mouse* netterm NetTerm mouse handling. The mouse generates "<Esc>}r,c<CR>", where "r,c" are two decimal numbers for the row and column. *dec-mouse* dec DEC terminal mouse handling. The mouse generates a rather complex sequence, starting with "<Esc>[". This is also available for an Xterm, if it was configured with "--enable-dec-locator". *jsbterm-mouse* jsbterm JSB term mouse handling. *pterm-mouse* pterm QNX pterm mouse handling. *urxvt-mouse* urxvt Mouse handling for the urxvt (rxvt-unicode) terminal. The mouse works only if the terminal supports this encoding style, but it does not have 223 columns limit unlike "xterm" or "xterm2". *sgr-mouse* sgr Mouse handling for the terminal that emits SGR-styled mouse reporting. The mouse works even in columns beyond 223. This option is backward compatible with "xterm2" because it can also decode "xterm2" style mouse codes. The mouse handling must be enabled at compile time |+mouse_xterm| |+mouse_dec| |+mouse_netterm| |+mouse_jsbterm| |+mouse_urxvt| |+mouse_sgr|. Only "xterm"(2) is really recognized. NetTerm mouse codes are always recognized, if enabled at compile time. DEC terminal mouse codes are recognized if enabled at compile time, and 'ttymouse' is not "xterm", "xterm2", "urxvt" or "sgr" (because dec mouse codes conflict with them). This option is automatically set to "xterm", when the 'term' option is set to a name that starts with "xterm", "mlterm", "screen", "tmux", "st" (full match only), "st-" or "stterm", and 'ttymouse' is not set already. Additionally, if vim is compiled with the |+termresponse| feature and |t_RV| is set to the escape sequence to request the xterm version number, more intelligent detection process runs. The "xterm2" value will be set if the xterm version is reported to be from 95 to 276. The "sgr" value will be set if the xterm version is 277 or higher and when Vim detects Mac Terminal.app or iTerm2. If you do not want 'ttymouse' to be set to "xterm2" or "sgr" automatically, set t_RV to an empty string: > :set t_RV= < *'ttyscroll'* *'tsl'* 'ttyscroll' 'tsl' number (default 999) global Maximum number of lines to scroll the screen. If there are more lines to scroll the window is redrawn. For terminals where scrolling is very slow and redrawing is not slow this can be set to a small number, e.g., 3, to speed up displaying. *'ttytype'* *'tty'* 'ttytype' 'tty' string (default from $TERM) global Alias for 'term', see above. *'undodir'* *'udir'* 'undodir' 'udir' string (default ".") global {not in Vi} {only when compiled with the |+persistent_undo| feature} List of directory names for undo files, separated with commas. See |'backupdir'| for details of the format. "." means using the directory of the file. The undo file name for "file.txt" is ".file.txt.un~". For other directories the file name is the full path of the edited file, with path separators replaced with "%". When writing: The first directory that exists is used. "." always works, no directories after "." will be used for writing. When reading all entries are tried to find an undo file. The first undo file that exists is used. When it cannot be read an error is given, no further entry is used. See |undo-persistence|. This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for security reasons. *'undofile'* *'noundofile'* *'udf'* *'noudf'* 'undofile' 'udf' boolean (default off) local to buffer {not in Vi} {only when compiled with the |+persistent_undo| feature} When on, Vim automatically saves undo history to an undo file when writing a buffer to a file, and restores undo history from the same file on buffer read. The directory where the undo file is stored is specified by 'undodir'. For more information about this feature see |undo-persistence|. The undo file is not read when 'undoreload' causes the buffer from before a reload to be saved for undo. When 'undofile' is turned off the undo file is NOT deleted. NOTE: This option is reset when 'compatible' is set. *'undolevels'* *'ul'* 'undolevels' 'ul' number (default 100, 1000 for Unix, VMS, Win32 and OS/2) global or local to buffer |global-local| {not in Vi} Maximum number of changes that can be undone. Since undo information is kept in memory, higher numbers will cause more memory to be used (nevertheless, a single change can use an unlimited amount of memory). Set to 0 for Vi compatibility: One level of undo and "u" undoes itself: > set ul=0 < But you can also get Vi compatibility by including the 'u' flag in 'cpoptions', and still be able to use CTRL-R to repeat undo. Also see |undo-two-ways|. Set to -1 for no undo at all. You might want to do this only for the current buffer: > setlocal ul=-1 < This helps when you run out of memory for a single change. The local value is set to -123456 when the global value is to be used. Also see |clear-undo|. *'undoreload'* *'ur'* 'undoreload' 'ur' number (default 10000) global {not in Vi} Save the whole buffer for undo when reloading it. This applies to the ":e!" command and reloading for when the buffer changed outside of Vim. |FileChangedShell| The save only happens when this option is negative or when the number of lines is smaller than the value of this option. Set this option to zero to disable undo for a reload. When saving undo for a reload, any undo file is not read. Note that this causes the whole buffer to be stored in memory. Set this option to a lower value if you run out of memory. *'updatecount'* *'uc'* 'updatecount' 'uc' number (default: 200) global {not in Vi} After typing this many characters the swap file will be written to disk. When zero, no swap file will be created at all (see chapter on recovery |crash-recovery|). 'updatecount' is set to zero by starting Vim with the "-n" option, see |startup|. When editing in readonly mode this option will be initialized to 10000. The swapfile can be disabled per buffer with |'swapfile'|. When 'updatecount' is set from zero to non-zero, swap files are created for all buffers that have 'swapfile' set. When 'updatecount' is set to zero, existing swap files are not deleted. Also see |'swapsync'|. This option has no meaning in buffers where |'buftype'| is "nofile" or "nowrite". *'updatetime'* *'ut'* 'updatetime' 'ut' number (default 4000) global {not in Vi} If this many milliseconds nothing is typed the swap file will be written to disk (see |crash-recovery|). Also used for the |CursorHold| autocommand event. *'verbose'* *'vbs'* 'verbose' 'vbs' number (default 0) global {not in Vi, although some versions have a boolean verbose option} When bigger than zero, Vim will give messages about what it is doing. Currently, these messages are given: >= 1 When the viminfo file is read or written. >= 2 When a file is ":source"'ed. >= 5 Every searched tags file and include file. >= 8 Files for which a group of autocommands is executed. >= 9 Every executed autocommand. >= 12 Every executed function. >= 13 When an exception is thrown, caught, finished, or discarded. >= 14 Anything pending in a ":finally" clause. >= 15 Every executed Ex command (truncated at 200 characters). This option can also be set with the "-V" argument. See |-V|. This option is also set by the |:verbose| command. When the 'verbosefile' option is set then the verbose messages are not displayed. *'verbosefile'* *'vfile'* 'verbosefile' 'vfile' string (default empty) global {not in Vi} When not empty all messages are written in a file with this name. When the file exists messages are appended. Writing to the file ends when Vim exits or when 'verbosefile' is made empty. Writes are buffered, thus may not show up for some time. Setting 'verbosefile' to a new value is like making it empty first. The difference with |:redir| is that verbose messages are not displayed when 'verbosefile' is set. *'viewdir'* *'vdir'* 'viewdir' 'vdir' string (default for Amiga, MS-DOS, OS/2 and Win32: "$VIM/vimfiles/view", for Unix: "~/.vim/view", for Macintosh: "$VIM:vimfiles:view" for VMS: "sys$login:vimfiles/view" for RiscOS: "Choices:vimfiles/view") global {not in Vi} {not available when compiled without the |+mksession| feature} Name of the directory where to store files for |:mkview|. This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for security reasons. *'viewoptions'* *'vop'* 'viewoptions' 'vop' string (default: "folds,options,cursor,curdir") global {not in Vi} {not available when compiled without the |+mksession| feature} Changes the effect of the |:mkview| command. It is a comma separated list of words. Each word enables saving and restoring something: word save and restore ~ cursor cursor position in file and in window folds manually created folds, opened/closed folds and local fold options options options and mappings local to a window or buffer (not global values for local options) localoptions same as "options" slash backslashes in file names replaced with forward slashes unix with Unix end-of-line format (single <NL>), even when on Windows or DOS curdir the window-local directory, if set with `:lcd` "slash" and "unix" are useful on Windows when sharing view files with Unix. The Unix version of Vim cannot source dos format scripts, but the Windows version of Vim can source unix format scripts. *'viminfo'* *'vi'* *E526* *E527* *E528* 'viminfo' 'vi' string (Vi default: "", Vim default for MS-DOS, Windows and OS/2: '100,<50,s10,h,rA:,rB:, for Amiga: '100,<50,s10,h,rdf0:,rdf1:,rdf2: for others: '100,<50,s10,h) global {not in Vi} {not available when compiled without the |+viminfo| feature} When non-empty, the viminfo file is read upon startup and written when exiting Vim (see |viminfo-file|). Except when 'viminfofile' is "NONE". The string should be a comma separated list of parameters, each consisting of a single character identifying the particular parameter, followed by a number or string which specifies the value of that parameter. If a particular character is left out, then the default value is used for that parameter. The following is a list of the identifying characters and the effect of their value. CHAR VALUE ~ *viminfo-!* ! When included, save and restore global variables that start with an uppercase letter, and don't contain a lowercase letter. Thus "KEEPTHIS and "K_L_M" are stored, but "KeepThis" and "_K_L_M" are not. Nested List and Dict items may not be read back correctly, you end up with an empty item. *viminfo-quote* " Maximum number of lines saved for each register. Old name of the '<' item, with the disadvantage that you need to put a backslash before the ", otherwise it will be recognized as the start of a comment! *viminfo-%* % When included, save and restore the buffer list. If Vim is started with a file name argument, the buffer list is not restored. If Vim is started without a file name argument, the buffer list is restored from the viminfo file. Quickfix ('buftype'), unlisted ('buflisted'), unnamed and buffers on removable media (|viminfo-r|) are not saved. When followed by a number, the number specifies the maximum number of buffers that are stored. Without a number all buffers are stored. *viminfo-'* ' Maximum number of previously edited files for which the marks are remembered. This parameter must always be included when 'viminfo' is non-empty. Including this item also means that the |jumplist| and the |changelist| are stored in the viminfo file. *viminfo-/* / Maximum number of items in the search pattern history to be saved. If non-zero, then the previous search and substitute patterns are also saved. When not included, the value of 'history' is used. *viminfo-:* : Maximum number of items in the command-line history to be saved. When not included, the value of 'history' is used. *viminfo-<* < Maximum number of lines saved for each register. If zero then registers are not saved. When not included, all lines are saved. '"' is the old name for this item. Also see the 's' item below: limit specified in Kbyte. *viminfo-@* @ Maximum number of items in the input-line history to be saved. When not included, the value of 'history' is used. *viminfo-c* c When included, convert the text in the viminfo file from the 'encoding' used when writing the file to the current 'encoding'. See |viminfo-encoding|. *viminfo-f* f Whether file marks need to be stored. If zero, file marks ('0 to '9, 'A to 'Z) are not stored. When not present or when non-zero, they are all stored. '0 is used for the current cursor position (when exiting or when doing ":wviminfo"). *viminfo-h* h Disable the effect of 'hlsearch' when loading the viminfo file. When not included, it depends on whether ":nohlsearch" has been used since the last search command. *viminfo-n* n Name of the viminfo file. The name must immediately follow the 'n'. Must be at the end of the option! If the 'viminfofile' option is set, that file name overrides the one given here with 'viminfo'. Environment variables are expanded when opening the file, not when setting the option. *viminfo-r* r Removable media. The argument is a string (up to the next ','). This parameter can be given several times. Each specifies the start of a path for which no marks will be stored. This is to avoid removable media. For MS-DOS you could use "ra:,rb:", for Amiga "rdf0:,rdf1:,rdf2:". You can also use it for temp files, e.g., for Unix: "r/tmp". Case is ignored. Maximum length of each 'r' argument is 50 characters. *viminfo-s* s Maximum size of an item in Kbyte. If zero then registers are not saved. Currently only applies to registers. The default "s10" will exclude registers with more than 10 Kbyte of text. Also see the '<' item above: line count limit. Example: > :set viminfo='50,<1000,s100,:0,n~/vim/viminfo < '50 Marks will be remembered for the last 50 files you edited. <1000 Contents of registers (up to 1000 lines each) will be remembered. s100 Registers with more than 100 Kbyte text are skipped. :0 Command-line history will not be saved. n~/vim/viminfo The name of the file to use is "~/vim/viminfo". no / Since '/' is not specified, the default will be used, that is, save all of the search history, and also the previous search and substitute patterns. no % The buffer list will not be saved nor read back. no h 'hlsearch' highlighting will be restored. When setting 'viminfo' from an empty value you can use |:rviminfo| to load the contents of the file, this is not done automatically. This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for security reasons. NOTE: This option is set to the Vim default value when 'compatible' is reset. *'viminfofile'* *'vif'* 'viminfofile' 'vif' string (default: "") global {not in Vi} {not available when compiled without the |+viminfo| feature} When non-empty, overrides the file name used for viminfo. When equal to "NONE" no viminfo file will be read or written. This option can be set with the |-i| command line flag. The |--clean| command line flag sets it to "NONE". This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for security reasons. *'virtualedit'* *'ve'* 'virtualedit' 've' string (default "") global {not in Vi} {not available when compiled without the |+virtualedit| feature} A comma separated list of these words: block Allow virtual editing in Visual block mode. insert Allow virtual editing in Insert mode. all Allow virtual editing in all modes. onemore Allow the cursor to move just past the end of the line Virtual editing means that the cursor can be positioned where there is no actual character. This can be halfway into a tab or beyond the end of the line. Useful for selecting a rectangle in Visual mode and editing a table. "onemore" is not the same, it will only allow moving the cursor just after the last character of the line. This makes some commands more consistent. Previously the cursor was always past the end of the line if the line was empty. But it is far from Vi compatible. It may also break some plugins or Vim scripts. For example because |l| can move the cursor after the last character. Use with care! Using the `$` command will move to the last character in the line, not past it. This may actually move the cursor to the left! The `g$` command will move to the end of the screen line. It doesn't make sense to combine "all" with "onemore", but you will not get a warning for it. NOTE: This option is set to "" when 'compatible' is set. *'visualbell'* *'vb'* *'novisualbell'* *'novb'* *beep* 'visualbell' 'vb' boolean (default off) global {not in Vi} Use a visual bell instead of beeping. The terminal code to display the visual bell is given with 't_vb'. When no beep or flash is wanted, use: > :set vb t_vb= < If you want a short flash, you can use this on many terminals: > :set vb t_vb=[?5h$<100>[?5l < Here $<100> specifies the time, you can use a smaller or bigger value to get a shorter or longer flash. Note: Vim will limit the bell to once per half a second. This avoids having to wait for the flashing to finish when there are lots of bells, e.g. on key repeat. This also happens without 'visualbell' set. In the GUI, 't_vb' defaults to "<Esc>|f", which inverts the display for 20 msec. If you want to use a different time, use "<Esc>|40f", where 40 is the time in msec. Note: When the GUI starts, 't_vb' is reset to its default value. You might want to set it again in your |gvimrc|. Does not work on the Amiga, you always get a screen flash. Also see 'errorbells'. *'warn'* *'nowarn'* 'warn' boolean (default on) global Give a warning message when a shell command is used while the buffer has been changed. *'weirdinvert'* *'wiv'* *'noweirdinvert'* *'nowiv'* 'weirdinvert' 'wiv' boolean (default off) global {not in Vi} This option has the same effect as the 't_xs' terminal option. It is provided for backwards compatibility with version 4.x. Setting 'weirdinvert' has the effect of making 't_xs' non-empty, and vice versa. Has no effect when the GUI is running. *'whichwrap'* *'ww'* 'whichwrap' 'ww' string (Vim default: "b,s", Vi default: "") global {not in Vi} Allow specified keys that move the cursor left/right to move to the previous/next line when the cursor is on the first/last character in the line. Concatenate characters to allow this for these keys: char key mode ~ b <BS> Normal and Visual s <Space> Normal and Visual h "h" Normal and Visual (not recommended) l "l" Normal and Visual (not recommended) < <Left> Normal and Visual > <Right> Normal and Visual ~ "~" Normal [ <Left> Insert and Replace ] <Right> Insert and Replace For example: > :set ww=<,>,[,] < allows wrap only when cursor keys are used. When the movement keys are used in combination with a delete or change operator, the <EOL> also counts for a character. This makes "3h" different from "3dh" when the cursor crosses the end of a line. This is also true for "x" and "X", because they do the same as "dl" and "dh". If you use this, you may also want to use the mapping ":map <BS> X" to make backspace delete the character in front of the cursor. When 'l' is included and it is used after an operator at the end of a line then it will not move to the next line. This makes "dl", "cl", "yl" etc. work normally. NOTE: This option is set to the Vi default value when 'compatible' is set and to the Vim default value when 'compatible' is reset. *'wildchar'* *'wc'* 'wildchar' 'wc' number (Vim default: <Tab>, Vi default: CTRL-E) global {not in Vi} Character you have to type to start wildcard expansion in the command-line, as specified with 'wildmode'. More info here: |cmdline-completion|. The character is not recognized when used inside a macro. See 'wildcharm' for that. Although 'wc' is a number option, you can set it to a special key: > :set wc=<Esc> < NOTE: This option is set to the Vi default value when 'compatible' is set and to the Vim default value when 'compatible' is reset. *'wildcharm'* *'wcm'* 'wildcharm' 'wcm' number (default: none (0)) global {not in Vi} 'wildcharm' works exactly like 'wildchar', except that it is recognized when used inside a macro. You can find "spare" command-line keys suitable for this option by looking at |ex-edit-index|. Normally you'll never actually type 'wildcharm', just use it in mappings that automatically invoke completion mode, e.g.: > :set wcm=<C-Z> :cnoremap ss so $vim/sessions/*.vim<C-Z> < Then after typing :ss you can use CTRL-P & CTRL-N. *'wildignore'* *'wig'* 'wildignore' 'wig' string (default "") global {not in Vi} {not available when compiled without the |+wildignore| feature} A list of file patterns. A file that matches with one of these patterns is ignored when expanding |wildcards|, completing file or directory names, and influences the result of |expand()|, |glob()| and |globpath()| unless a flag is passed to disable this. The pattern is used like with |:autocmd|, see |autocmd-patterns|. Also see 'suffixes'. Example: > :set wildignore=*.o,*.obj < The use of |:set+=| and |:set-=| is preferred when adding or removing a pattern from the list. This avoids problems when a future version uses another default. *'wildignorecase'* *'wic'* *'nowildignorecase'* *'nowic'* 'wildignorecase' 'wic' boolean (default off) global {not in Vi} When set case is ignored when completing file names and directories. Has no effect when 'fileignorecase' is set. Does not apply when the shell is used to expand wildcards, which happens when there are special characters. *'wildmenu'* *'wmnu'* *'nowildmenu'* *'nowmnu'* 'wildmenu' 'wmnu' boolean (default off, set in |defaults.vim|) global {not in Vi} {not available if compiled without the |+wildmenu| feature} When 'wildmenu' is on, command-line completion operates in an enhanced mode. On pressing 'wildchar' (usually <Tab>) to invoke completion, the possible matches are shown just above the command line, with the first match highlighted (overwriting the status line, if there is one). Keys that show the previous/next match, such as <Tab> or CTRL-P/CTRL-N, cause the highlight to move to the appropriate match. When 'wildmode' is used, "wildmenu" mode is used where "full" is specified. "longest" and "list" do not start "wildmenu" mode. You can check the current mode with |wildmenumode()|. If there are more matches than can fit in the line, a ">" is shown on the right and/or a "<" is shown on the left. The status line scrolls as needed. The "wildmenu" mode is abandoned when a key is hit that is not used for selecting a completion. While the "wildmenu" is active the following keys have special meanings: <Left> <Right> - select previous/next match (like CTRL-P/CTRL-N) <Down> - in filename/menu name completion: move into a subdirectory or submenu. <CR> - in menu completion, when the cursor is just after a dot: move into a submenu. <Up> - in filename/menu name completion: move up into parent directory or parent menu. This makes the menus accessible from the console |console-menus|. If you prefer the <Left> and <Right> keys to move the cursor instead of selecting a different match, use this: > :cnoremap <Left> <Space><BS><Left> :cnoremap <Right> <Space><BS><Right> < The "WildMenu" highlighting is used for displaying the current match |hl-WildMenu|. *'wildmode'* *'wim'* 'wildmode' 'wim' string (Vim default: "full") global {not in Vi} Completion mode that is used for the character specified with 'wildchar'. It is a comma separated list of up to four parts. Each part specifies what to do for each consecutive use of 'wildchar'. The first part specifies the behavior for the first use of 'wildchar', The second part for the second use, etc. These are the possible values for each part: "" Complete only the first match. "full" Complete the next full match. After the last match, the original string is used and then the first match again. "longest" Complete till longest common string. If this doesn't result in a longer string, use the next part. "longest:full" Like "longest", but also start 'wildmenu' if it is enabled. "list" When more than one match, list all matches. "list:full" When more than one match, list all matches and complete first match. "list:longest" When more than one match, list all matches and complete till longest common string. When there is only a single match, it is fully completed in all cases. Examples: > :set wildmode=full < Complete first full match, next match, etc. (the default) > :set wildmode=longest,full < Complete longest common string, then each full match > :set wildmode=list:full < List all matches and complete each full match > :set wildmode=list,full < List all matches without completing, then each full match > :set wildmode=longest,list < Complete longest common string, then list alternatives. More info here: |cmdline-completion|. *'wildoptions'* *'wop'* 'wildoptions' 'wop' string (default "") global {not in Vi} {not available when compiled without the |+wildignore| feature} A list of words that change how command line completion is done. Currently only one word is allowed: tagfile When using CTRL-D to list matching tags, the kind of tag and the file of the tag is listed. Only one match is displayed per line. Often used tag kinds are: d #define f function Also see |cmdline-completion|. *'winaltkeys'* *'wak'* 'winaltkeys' 'wak' string (default "menu") global {not in Vi} {only used in Win32, Motif, GTK and Photon GUI} Some GUI versions allow the access to menu entries by using the ALT key in combination with a character that appears underlined in the menu. This conflicts with the use of the ALT key for mappings and entering special characters. This option tells what to do: no Don't use ALT keys for menus. ALT key combinations can be mapped, but there is no automatic handling. This can then be done with the |:simalt| command. yes ALT key handling is done by the windowing system. ALT key combinations cannot be mapped. menu Using ALT in combination with a character that is a menu shortcut key, will be handled by the windowing system. Other keys can be mapped. If the menu is disabled by excluding 'm' from 'guioptions', the ALT key is never used for the menu. This option is not used for <F10>; on Win32 and with GTK <F10> will select the menu, unless it has been mapped. *'window'* *'wi'* 'window' 'wi' number (default screen height - 1) global Window height. Do not confuse this with the height of the Vim window, use 'lines' for that. Used for |CTRL-F| and |CTRL-B| when there is only one window and the value is smaller than 'lines' minus one. The screen will scroll 'window' minus two lines, with a minimum of one. When 'window' is equal to 'lines' minus one CTRL-F and CTRL-B scroll in a much smarter way, taking care of wrapping lines. When resizing the Vim window, the value is smaller than 1 or more than or equal to 'lines' it will be set to 'lines' minus 1. {Vi also uses the option to specify the number of displayed lines} *'winheight'* *'wh'* *E591* 'winheight' 'wh' number (default 1) global {not in Vi} {not available when compiled without the |+windows| feature} Minimal number of lines for the current window. This is not a hard minimum, Vim will use fewer lines if there is not enough room. If the focus goes to a window that is smaller, its size is increased, at the cost of the height of other windows. Set 'winheight' to a small number for normal editing. Set it to 999 to make the current window fill most of the screen. Other windows will be only 'winminheight' high. This has the drawback that ":all" will create only two windows. To avoid "vim -o 1 2 3 4" to create only two windows, set the option after startup is done, using the |VimEnter| event: > au VimEnter * set winheight=999 < Minimum value is 1. The height is not adjusted after one of the commands that change the height of the current window. 'winheight' applies to the current window. Use 'winminheight' to set the minimal height for other windows. *'winfixheight'* *'wfh'* *'nowinfixheight'* *'nowfh'* 'winfixheight' 'wfh' boolean (default off) local to window {not in Vi} {not available when compiled without the |+windows| feature} Keep the window height when windows are opened or closed and 'equalalways' is set. Also for |CTRL-W_=|. Set by default for the |preview-window| and |quickfix-window|. The height may be changed anyway when running out of room. *'winfixwidth'* *'wfw'* *'nowinfixwidth'* *'nowfw'* 'winfixwidth' 'wfw' boolean (default off) local to window {not in Vi} {not available when compiled without the |+windows| feature} Keep the window width when windows are opened or closed and 'equalalways' is set. Also for |CTRL-W_=|. The width may be changed anyway when running out of room. *'winminheight'* *'wmh'* 'winminheight' 'wmh' number (default 1) global {not in Vi} {not available when compiled without the |+windows| feature} The minimal height of a window, when it's not the current window. This is a hard minimum, windows will never become smaller. When set to zero, windows may be "squashed" to zero lines (i.e. just a status bar) if necessary. They will return to at least one line when they become active (since the cursor has to have somewhere to go.) Use 'winheight' to set the minimal height of the current window. This option is only checked when making a window smaller. Don't use a large number, it will cause errors when opening more than a few windows. A value of 0 to 3 is reasonable. *'winminwidth'* *'wmw'* 'winminwidth' 'wmw' number (default 1) global {not in Vi} {not available when compiled without the |+vertsplit| feature} The minimal width of a window, when it's not the current window. This is a hard minimum, windows will never become smaller. When set to zero, windows may be "squashed" to zero columns (i.e. just a vertical separator) if necessary. They will return to at least one line when they become active (since the cursor has to have somewhere to go.) Use 'winwidth' to set the minimal width of the current window. This option is only checked when making a window smaller. Don't use a large number, it will cause errors when opening more than a few windows. A value of 0 to 12 is reasonable. *'winptydll'* 'winptydll' string (default "winpty32.dll" or "winpty64.dll") global {not in Vi} {only available when compiled with the |terminal| feature on MS-Windows} Specifies the name of the winpty shared library, used for the |:terminal| command. The default depends on whether was build as a 32-bit or 64-bit executable. If not found, "winpty.dll" is tried as a fallback. Environment variables are expanded |:set_env|. This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for security reasons. *'winwidth'* *'wiw'* *E592* 'winwidth' 'wiw' number (default 20) global {not in Vi} {not available when compiled without the |+vertsplit| feature} Minimal number of columns for the current window. This is not a hard minimum, Vim will use fewer columns if there is not enough room. If the current window is smaller, its size is increased, at the cost of the width of other windows. Set it to 999 to make the current window always fill the screen. Set it to a small number for normal editing. The width is not adjusted after one of the commands to change the width of the current window. 'winwidth' applies to the current window. Use 'winminwidth' to set the minimal width for other windows. *'wrap'* *'nowrap'* 'wrap' boolean (default on) local to window {not in Vi} This option changes how text is displayed. It doesn't change the text in the buffer, see 'textwidth' for that. When on, lines longer than the width of the window will wrap and displaying continues on the next line. When off lines will not wrap and only part of long lines will be displayed. When the cursor is moved to a part that is not shown, the screen will scroll horizontally. The line will be broken in the middle of a word if necessary. See 'linebreak' to get the break at a word boundary. To make scrolling horizontally a bit more useful, try this: > :set sidescroll=5 :set listchars+=precedes:<,extends:> < See 'sidescroll', 'listchars' and |wrap-off|. This option can't be set from a |modeline| when the 'diff' option is on. *'wrapmargin'* *'wm'* 'wrapmargin' 'wm' number (default 0) local to buffer Number of characters from the right window border where wrapping starts. When typing text beyond this limit, an <EOL> will be inserted and inserting continues on the next line. Options that add a margin, such as 'number' and 'foldcolumn', cause the text width to be further reduced. This is Vi compatible. When 'textwidth' is non-zero, this option is not used. This option is set to 0 when 'paste' is set and restored when 'paste' is reset. See also 'formatoptions' and |ins-textwidth|. {Vi: works differently and less usefully} *'wrapscan'* *'ws'* *'nowrapscan'* *'nows'* 'wrapscan' 'ws' boolean (default on) *E384* *E385* global Searches wrap around the end of the file. Also applies to |]s| and |[s|, searching for spelling mistakes. *'write'* *'nowrite'* 'write' boolean (default on) global {not in Vi} Allows writing files. When not set, writing a file is not allowed. Can be used for a view-only mode, where modifications to the text are still allowed. Can be reset with the |-m| or |-M| command line argument. Filtering text is still possible, even though this requires writing a temporary file. *'writeany'* *'wa'* *'nowriteany'* *'nowa'* 'writeany' 'wa' boolean (default off) global Allows writing to any file with no need for "!" override. *'writebackup'* *'wb'* *'nowritebackup'* *'nowb'* 'writebackup' 'wb' boolean (default on with |+writebackup| feature, off otherwise) global {not in Vi} Make a backup before overwriting a file. The backup is removed after the file was successfully written, unless the 'backup' option is also on. WARNING: Switching this option off means that when Vim fails to write your buffer correctly and then, for whatever reason, Vim exits, you lose both the original file and what you were writing. Only reset this option if your file system is almost full and it makes the write fail (and make sure not to exit Vim until the write was successful). See |backup-table| for another explanation. When the 'backupskip' pattern matches, a backup is not made anyway. NOTE: This option is set to the default value when 'compatible' is set. *'writedelay'* *'wd'* 'writedelay' 'wd' number (default 0) global {not in Vi} The number of milliseconds to wait for each character sent to the screen. When non-zero, characters are sent to the terminal one by one. For MS-DOS pcterm this does not work. For debugging purposes. vim:tw=78:ts=8:ft=help:norl:
Save File
Cancel